+

WO2018181165A1 - Printing device, printing control method, and device - Google Patents

Printing device, printing control method, and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018181165A1
WO2018181165A1 PCT/JP2018/012110 JP2018012110W WO2018181165A1 WO 2018181165 A1 WO2018181165 A1 WO 2018181165A1 JP 2018012110 W JP2018012110 W JP 2018012110W WO 2018181165 A1 WO2018181165 A1 WO 2018181165A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
stack
unit
bundle
printing apparatus
varnish
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/012110
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
洋明 北條
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2018181165A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018181165A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41FPRINTING MACHINES OR PRESSES
    • B41F33/00Indicating, counting, warning, control or safety devices
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J29/00Details of, or accessories for, typewriters or selective printing mechanisms not otherwise provided for
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J29/00Details of, or accessories for, typewriters or selective printing mechanisms not otherwise provided for
    • B41J29/38Drives, motors, controls or automatic cut-off devices for the entire printing mechanism
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H31/00Pile receivers
    • B65H31/24Pile receivers multiple or compartmented, e.d. for alternate, programmed, or selective filling
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H33/00Forming counted batches in delivery pile or stream of articles
    • B65H33/04Forming counted batches in delivery pile or stream of articles by inserting marker slips in pile or stream
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H33/00Forming counted batches in delivery pile or stream of articles
    • B65H33/14Forming counted batches in delivery pile or stream of articles by diverting batches to separate receivers

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a printing apparatus, a printing control method, and an apparatus, and more particularly, to a blocking suppression technique when stacking varnished printed materials.
  • a varnish coat is known as one of the surface treatments for printed materials.
  • Varnishing is a technique for coating the image surface of a printed material using a varnish.
  • the varnish coat is performed for the purpose of, for example, giving gloss to the image surface to give a high quality feeling to the printed matter, or improving the abrasion resistance and / or chemical resistance of the image surface.
  • Patent Document 1 describes an ink jet printing apparatus having a function of applying a varnish to an image surface of paper after image formation.
  • Blocking is synonymous with “stacker blocking”.
  • the problem of blocking is a problem common not only to printing apparatuses that form images by the inkjet method, but also to printing apparatuses of various image forming methods such as plate-type printing apparatuses that form images using plates.
  • the ink jet printing apparatus using the water-based ink the amount of moisture applied to the paper is relatively large, and thus the above problem is particularly remarkable.
  • Patent Document 1 there are an inline method, an offline method, and an online method as varnish methods. In any of these methods, blocking can occur, but the above problem is particularly remarkable in the case of the inline method.
  • the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and provides a printing apparatus, a printing control method, and an apparatus capable of suppressing the occurrence of blocking in a stacking portion when stacking printed matter after applying a water-based varnish. With the goal.
  • a printing apparatus includes an image forming unit that forms an image on a medium, a varnish applying unit that applies an aqueous varnish to a medium on which an image is formed using the image forming unit, and a medium on which an aqueous varnish is applied Is applied under predetermined conditions to a powder having a blocking inhibitory effect, and is stacked at a specific stacking speed, medium type of medium, varnish type of aqueous varnish, ink amount used for image formation, and accumulation
  • a stack allowable number determining unit that determines a stack allowable number of sheets that can be stacked without occurrence of blocking at a specific stack speed from a combination of two or more conditions among the amount of powder applied by the unit, and printing When the number of prints specified as the number exceeds the allowable number of stacks, printing of the specified number of prints can be realized, and the occurrence of blocking is reduced.
  • printing apparatus comprising an information presenting section for presenting the one blocking control measures.
  • the printing apparatus of the first aspect determines the allowable number of stacks from a combination of two or more conditions of the medium type of the medium used for printing, the varnish type of the aqueous varnish, the ink amount, and the powder amount.
  • the printing apparatus according to the first aspect can predict whether or not blocking has occurred in the stacking unit when the designated number of printed sheets is printed by comparing the designated number of printed sheets with the stack allowable number. If the number of printed sheets exceeds the stack allowable number, blocking is predicted to occur.
  • the printing apparatus according to the first aspect presents at least one blocking suppression measure that can realize printing of a specified number of printed sheets and suppress the occurrence of blocking when the number of printed sheets exceeds the stack allowable number.
  • the user can grasp in advance whether blocking occurs in the stacking unit.
  • the presented blocking suppression measure it is possible to prevent the occurrence of blocking in the stacking unit when printing a specified number of printed sheets.
  • the amount of ink used to form an image has a correlation with the content of the image to be printed.
  • the ink amount can be obtained by calculation from a signal value of image data to be printed, for example. That is, the ink amount can be evaluated based on the image data.
  • a selection instruction receiving unit that receives an input of an instruction for selecting whether or not to adopt at least one blocking suppression measure presented to the information presentation unit, and a selection instruction receiving unit are input. And a control unit that controls execution of the blocking suppression measure in accordance with the selection instruction.
  • the “selection instruction” includes at least one of an instruction to select a blocking suppression measure to be adopted from one or more candidate blocking suppression measures presented, and an instruction to select not to adopt a blocking suppression measure.
  • One instruction is included.
  • Controlling execution of blocking suppression measures includes control of whether or not to execute blocking suppression measures. That is, it is included in the concept of “controlling execution of the blocking suppression measure” not to execute any one or more of the presented blocking suppression measures.
  • the user can determine whether or not to adopt the blocking suppression measure presented in the information presentation unit, and can input a selection instruction for adoption from the selection instruction receiving unit.
  • a stack of media equal to or smaller than the allowable number of stacks is stacked on the stacking unit at a specific stack speed.
  • a stack operation that forms a single stack bundle may be executed.
  • a stacking method in which a single stack bundle is formed by stacking media on the stacking unit at a specific stacking speed.
  • the blocking suppression measure can be configured as a measure for implementing the second stack method in which the stack operation is different from the first stack method.
  • each of a plurality of combinations of two or more conditions among a medium type, a varnish type, an ink amount, and a powder amount is provided, and the allowable stack number determining unit is configured to determine the allowable stack number using the first calculation table. Can do.
  • the stack allowable number determination unit can determine the stack allowable number suitable for the conditions using the first calculation table from the given printing conditions.
  • the printing conditions include two or more conditions of medium type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount.
  • one of the blocking suppression measures is to stack the stacking unit at a specific stack speed, and the stack number becomes the stack allowable number. When it reaches, it can be set as the structure which is a policy of newly stacking another stack bundle.
  • the stacking unit includes a stacking device in which a partition member for separating the stack bundle is disposed for each stack allowable number, and a new stack bundle is stacked on the partition member. Can be configured.
  • the stacking unit includes a stack bundle retracting mechanism that moves the stack bundle that has reached the stack allowable number from the stack position to another retract position. Can do.
  • the stack bundle retracting mechanism includes a belt conveyor, and the belt conveyor has a belt length capable of placing each of the plurality of stack bundles at different positions on the belt conveyor. It can be configured.
  • the stack bundle retracting mechanism includes a turntable having a plurality of stack areas on which a plurality of stack bundles can be placed, and the turntable is rotated to stack the stack bundles. The position of the stacked stack area can be moved.
  • the total number of stack bundles when a new stack bundle is stacked for each stack allowable number with respect to the number of printed sheets, the total number of stack bundles When the number of stacks is 3 or more, the first stack bundle that has reached the allowable stack quantity is separated from the first stack bundle after the stack quantity of the newly stacked second stack bundle has reached the allowable stack quantity. Any one of the third and subsequent stack bundles may be stacked on the first stack bundle whose specified time has elapsed since the stack end of the stack bundle.
  • the printing apparatus when one of the blocking suppression measures stacks a stack bundle at a specific stack speed and the stack number reaches the stack allowable number, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which printing is temporarily stopped and printing is resumed after a specified time has elapsed and the stack is continued in the stack bundle.
  • a specified time determining unit that determines a specified time that can be stacked without occurrence of blocking at a specific stack speed on a stack bundle that has reached the allowable stack number can be provided.
  • a stack allowable number value and a specified time value for a plurality of combinations of two or more conditions among medium type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount are set.
  • the second calculation table can serve as the first calculation table.
  • the allowable stack number determining unit can determine the allowable stack number suitable for the conditions using the second calculation table from the given printing conditions.
  • the specified time determination unit can determine a specified time suitable for the conditions using the second calculation table from the given printing conditions.
  • one of the blocking suppression measures can be configured to make the stack speed slower than a specific stack speed.
  • a stack speed determining unit that determines a stack speed at which stacking can be performed more than the number of printed sheets without occurrence of blocking, and a stack speed determined by the stack speed determining unit
  • a stack speed control unit that controls the stack speed
  • the stack speed determining unit calculates a stack speed that allows stacking of the number of print sheets or more using the number of printed sheets, the stack allowable number, and a specific stack speed. It can be configured.
  • the stack speed control unit may be configured to control the medium conveyance speed.
  • the stack speed control unit can control the medium supply time interval for supplying the medium to the image forming unit.
  • one of the blocking suppression measures is to hold a bundle of media divided into a smaller number of smaller copies than the allowable number of stacks for a certain period of time. After that, by stacking the media, it is possible to adopt a configuration that is a measure for forming a stack bundle having a stack number exceeding the allowable number of stacks.
  • the stacking unit has a plurality of storage shelves for storing a small number of medium bundles, and sequentially moves the plurality of storage shelves so that a small number of copies are stored in the storage shelf. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which a stack of media is stored and a stacking device that holds a bundle of a small number of media in a storage shelf for a certain period of time.
  • the stacking unit injects air from a side surface direction of the medium to a position where the medium bundle is constrained, and constrains a small number of medium bundles by the ejected air. By doing so, it is possible to provide a stacking device that holds a bundle of a small number of media for a certain period of time.
  • the stacking unit includes a stacking device including a movable holding member that holds a small number of medium bundles, and the holding member is a small number of medium bundles. Can be moved to a non-holding position where a small number of medium bundles are not held, and after the small number of medium bundles are held by the holding member, the holding member is moved to the non-holding position. By releasing the holding state, the medium can be stacked.
  • the image forming unit may include an inkjet head.
  • each aspect of a 1st aspect may be combined suitably to a 24th aspect.
  • a printing apparatus that can execute two or more blocking suppression measures among the blocking suppression measures shown as the sixth aspect, the twelfth aspect, the fifteenth aspect, and the nineteenth aspect.
  • an aqueous varnish is applied to a medium on which an image is formed, and a powder having a blocking inhibiting effect is applied to the medium on which the aqueous varnish is applied under predetermined conditions, and at a specific stack speed.
  • a printing control method for controlling the operation of a printing apparatus stacked in a stacking unit which is used for forming a medium type of an image-forming medium, an aqueous varnish type applied to an image-forming medium, and forming an image.
  • a stack that determines the allowable number of stacks that can be stacked without causing blocking at a specific stack speed from a combination of two or more conditions among the ink amount of ink and the amount of powder applied in the stacking unit.
  • the same matters as the specific matters of the printing apparatus specified in the second to twenty-fourth aspects can be appropriately combined.
  • the processing unit or function unit serving as a unit responsible for the processing or operation function specified in the printing apparatus can be grasped as an element of a “process (step)” of the corresponding processing or operation.
  • a printing control apparatus includes a medium type of a medium on which an image is formed, a varnish type of an aqueous varnish applied to the medium on which an image is formed, an ink amount of ink used for forming an image, and an aqueous varnish. From the combination of two or more conditions of the amount of powder having a blocking deterrent effect that is applied to the medium on which the coating is applied in a predetermined condition, the powder is stacked at a specific stack speed without blocking.
  • a stack allowable number determination unit that determines an allowable stack number, and when the number of prints specified as the number of sheets to be printed exceeds the stack allowable number, printing of the specified number of prints can be realized, and blocking is also possible.
  • An information presentation unit that presents at least one blocking suppression measure that suppresses occurrence.
  • the printing control apparatus can be used as a control apparatus for a printing apparatus that performs image formation and aqueous varnish application.
  • matters similar to the identification items of the printing apparatus identified in the second aspect to the twenty-fourth aspect can be appropriately combined.
  • the user can grasp in advance before printing whether or not blocking occurs in the stacking unit.
  • the presented blocking suppression measures it is possible to prevent the occurrence of blocking in the stacking unit when printing a specified number of printed sheets.
  • FIG. 1 is an overall configuration diagram illustrating an example of an inkjet printing apparatus.
  • FIG. 2 is a graph illustrating the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case of stacking the printed materials coated with the aqueous varnish.
  • FIG. 3 is a graph of another example showing the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case where the printed materials coated with the aqueous varnish are stacked.
  • FIG. 4 is a graph of another example showing the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case where the printed matter coated with the aqueous varnish is stacked.
  • FIG. 5 is a chart showing an example of a calculation table used for calculating the allowable stack number X.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a part of functions realized by the control device of the inkjet printing apparatus.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the control device.
  • FIG. 8 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing an outline of the first example of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically illustrating a specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 1 of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the first example of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the first example of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing an outline of the example 2 of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 13 is a chart showing an example of a calculation table used for calculating the specified time T.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating functions of an inkjet printing apparatus that implements Example 2 of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating functions of an inkjet printing apparatus that implements Example 3 of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically illustrating a specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 4 of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a bundle of printed materials stored in the storage shelf in the stacking apparatus illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the operation of the integrated device shown in FIGS. 16 and 17.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the blocking suppression measure example 4.
  • FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the blocking suppression measure example 4.
  • FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a control system of the inkjet printing apparatus.
  • FIG. 22 is a block diagram of functions realized by the control device.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a printing processing procedure for performing varnish coating.
  • FIG. 1 is an overall configuration diagram illustrating an example of an inkjet printing apparatus.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 is configured as a printing apparatus capable of varnish coating inline.
  • the ink jet printing apparatus 1 includes a paper feeding unit 10, a treatment liquid application unit 20, a treatment liquid drying unit 30, an image forming unit 40, an ink drying unit 50, a varnish application unit 60, and a varnish post-processing unit 70. And an accumulating unit 80.
  • the paper feeding unit 10 feeds paper P, which is a sheet of paper, one by one.
  • the paper feeding unit 10 includes a paper feeding device 11, a feeder board 12, and a paper feeding drum 13.
  • the paper P is placed on the paper feed tray of the paper feeder 11 in a paper bundle state.
  • the type of the paper P is not particularly limited, and for example, general-purpose printing paper such as high-quality paper, coated paper, and art paper can be used.
  • General-purpose printing paper is not so-called inkjet paper but coated paper or non-coated paper generally used in contact printing such as offset printing, and refers to paper mainly composed of cellulose. .
  • the paper P is an example of a medium on which an image is formed.
  • the paper feeding device 11 feeds the paper P stacked on the paper feeding tray one by one from the top of the paper bundle one by one at a constant paper feeding time interval to the feeder board 12.
  • the feeder board 12 conveys the sheet P received from the sheet feeding device 11 along a certain conveyance path and delivers it to the sheet feeding drum 13.
  • the paper supply drum 13 conveys the paper P received from the feeder board 12 along a certain conveyance path, and delivers it to the treatment liquid coating drum 21.
  • the paper feed drum 13 includes a gripper (not shown) on the drum peripheral surface.
  • the paper feed drum 13 conveys the paper P around the drum circumferential surface by gripping and rotating the leading edge of the paper P with a gripper (not shown).
  • the processing liquid application unit 20 applies the processing liquid to the paper P.
  • the processing liquid of this example is a liquid containing an aggregating agent that aggregates the color material components in the ink used in the image forming unit 40.
  • the flocculant may be a compound that can change the pH (pH) of the ink composition, a polyvalent metal salt, or a polyallylamine.
  • Preferred examples of the compound capable of lowering the pH include acidic substances having high water solubility.
  • An acidic substance may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the treatment liquid may be referred to by terms such as a pretreatment liquid, a precoat liquid, or a preconditioning liquid.
  • the treatment liquid application unit 20 includes a treatment liquid application drum 21 and a treatment liquid application device 22.
  • the treatment liquid application drum 21 conveys the paper P received from the paper supply drum 13 along a certain conveyance path and delivers it to the treatment liquid drying drum 31.
  • the treatment liquid coating drum 21 includes a gripper (not shown) on the peripheral surface of the drum. The treatment liquid coating drum 21 grips and rotates the leading end of the paper P with a gripper (not shown), thereby winding and transporting the paper P around the drum peripheral surface.
  • the processing liquid coating device 22 applies the processing liquid to the first surface of the paper P conveyed by the processing liquid coating drum 21.
  • the first surface of the paper P corresponds to an image forming surface on which an image is formed with ink.
  • the image forming surface is synonymous with the printing surface.
  • the surface opposite to the first surface of the paper P is referred to as the second surface.
  • the processing liquid coating apparatus 22 of this example applies the processing liquid to the paper P by a roller coating method. That is, the processing liquid coating apparatus 22 includes a coating roller, and applies the processing liquid to the paper P by pressing the coating roller with the processing liquid applied to the peripheral surface against the printing surface of the paper P.
  • the coating method of the treatment liquid coating apparatus 22 is not particularly limited, and another coating method such as an inkjet method or a spray method may be employed instead of the roller coating method.
  • the treatment liquid drying unit 30 dries the treatment liquid applied to the paper P.
  • the processing liquid drying unit 30 includes a processing liquid drying drum 31, a first paper guide 32, and a dryer 33.
  • the treatment liquid drying drum 31 conveys the paper P received from the treatment liquid application drum 21 along a certain conveyance path and delivers it to the image forming drum 41.
  • the treatment liquid drying drum 31 includes a gripper (not shown) on the peripheral surface of the drum.
  • the paper feed drum 13 conveys the paper P around the drum circumferential surface by gripping and rotating the leading edge of the paper P with a gripper (not shown).
  • the first paper guide 32 is arranged along the transport path of the paper P by the treatment liquid drying drum 31 and guides the transport of the paper P.
  • the paper P is conveyed while sliding on the first paper guide 32.
  • the dryer 33 blows hot air onto the first surface of the paper P conveyed by the processing liquid drying drum 31 to heat the first surface of the paper P coated with the processing liquid.
  • the dryer 33 is disposed inside the processing liquid drying drum 31.
  • the dryer 33 includes, for example, a heat source such as a halogen heater or an infrared heater, and a blowing unit that blows the gas heated by the heat source.
  • the gas heated by the heat source is, for example, air. Other gases may be used instead of or in addition to air.
  • the air blowing means for example, a fan or a blower can be used.
  • the heating intensity can be controlled by adjusting at least one of the number of lighting heaters and / or the lighting duty ratio.
  • the hot air from the dryer 33 is blown onto the first surface of the paper P in the process of being conveyed by the treatment liquid drying drum 31.
  • the first surface which is the treatment liquid application surface of the paper P
  • the solvent component of the treatment liquid applied to the paper P is removed by drying.
  • an ink aggregation layer is formed on the first surface of the paper P.
  • the ink aggregating layer refers to a layer of an ink aggregating agent contained in the processing liquid.
  • the water in the processing liquid evaporates by the processing liquid drying unit 30, and an ink aggregation layer that is a thin film layer of the ink aggregation agent of the processing liquid is formed on the first surface of the paper P.
  • the image forming unit 40 forms an image on the first surface of the paper P by an inkjet method.
  • the image forming unit 40 includes an image forming drum 41, a sheet pressing roller 42, ink jet heads 43 ⁇ / b> C, 43 ⁇ / b> M, 43 ⁇ / b> Y, 43 ⁇ / b> K, and a scanner 44.
  • the image forming drum 41 receives the paper P from the processing liquid drying drum 31, transports the received paper P along a certain transport path, and delivers it to the first chain delivery 51.
  • the image forming drum 41 grips and rotates the front end of the paper P with a gripper (not shown) provided on the peripheral surface, thereby winding and transporting the paper P around the peripheral surface.
  • a large number of suction holes (not shown) for adsorbing paper are formed on the peripheral surface of the image forming drum 41, and the paper P is adsorbed and held on the peripheral surface of the image forming drum 41 by the negative pressure generated in the suction holes.
  • the image forming drum 41 is not limited to the configuration in which the paper P is sucked and fixed by negative pressure suction, and may be configured to suck and hold the paper P by electrostatic suction, for example.
  • the paper pressing roller 42 presses the paper P against the peripheral surface of the image forming drum 41 and closely contacts the peripheral surface of the image forming drum 41.
  • the inkjet head 43C is a recording head that discharges cyan (C) ink droplets.
  • the inkjet head 43M is a recording head that ejects magenta (M) ink droplets.
  • the inkjet head 43Y is a recording head that discharges yellow (Y) ink droplets.
  • the inkjet head 43K is a recording head that ejects black (K) ink droplets.
  • Each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K is supplied with ink from an ink tank (not shown) that is an ink supply source of a corresponding color via a pipe path (not shown).
  • Each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K is a line-type inkjet head. That is, the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K are constituted by line heads having nozzle rows in which nozzles are arranged over a length corresponding to the drawable range of the maximum paper width.
  • a plurality of nozzles serving as ink ejection openings are two-dimensionally arranged on the nozzle surfaces of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K.
  • “Nozzle surface” refers to an ejection surface on which nozzles are formed, and is synonymous with terms such as “ink ejection surface” or “nozzle formation surface”.
  • a nozzle arrangement of a plurality of nozzles arranged two-dimensionally is called a “two-dimensional nozzle arrangement”.
  • Each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K can be configured by connecting a plurality of head modules in the paper width direction.
  • the paper width here refers to the paper width in a direction orthogonal to the conveyance direction of the paper P.
  • Each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K is a nozzle capable of recording an image with a specified recording resolution in one scan of the entire recording area of the paper P in the paper width direction orthogonal to the transport direction of the paper P.
  • This is a line type recording head having columns.
  • Such a recording head is also called a “full line type recording head” or a “page wide head”.
  • the projection nozzle array in which the nozzles in the two-dimensional nozzle array are projected (orthographically projected) along the nozzle array direction achieves the maximum recording resolution in the nozzle array direction.
  • the nozzle density is equivalent to a single nozzle row in which each nozzle is arranged at approximately equal intervals.
  • the “substantially equidistant” means that the droplet ejection points that can be recorded by the ink jet printing apparatus are substantially equidistant.
  • the concept of “equally spaced” includes a case where the distance is slightly different in consideration of manufacturing errors and / or movement of droplets on the medium due to landing interference.
  • the projection nozzle row corresponds to a substantial nozzle row. Considering the projection nozzle row, it is possible to associate a nozzle number representing the nozzle position with each nozzle in the arrangement order of the projection nozzles arranged along the nozzle row direction.
  • the nozzle arrangement form in each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K is not limited, and various nozzle arrangement forms can be adopted.
  • a linear array of lines, a V-shaped nozzle array, a polygonal nozzle array such as a W-shape with a V-shaped array as a repeating unit, and the like are also possible. It is.
  • the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K are arranged on the conveyance path of the paper P at a constant interval, and the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K extend in a direction orthogonal to the conveyance direction of the paper P. To be installed.
  • the direction orthogonal to the transport direction of the paper P is a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the image forming drum 41.
  • Ink droplets are ejected from at least one of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K toward the paper P conveyed by the image forming drum 41, and the ejected droplets adhere to the paper P. Thus, an image is formed on the paper P.
  • CMYK complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • ink color and number of colors is not limited to this embodiment, and light ink, dark ink, special color ink, etc. are added as necessary. May be.
  • the arrangement order of the ink jet heads for each color is not particularly limited.
  • the scanner 44 is an apparatus that optically reads an image formed on the paper P by the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K, and generates electronic image data indicating the read image.
  • the scanner 44 includes an imaging device that captures an image recorded on the paper P and converts it into an electrical signal indicating image information.
  • a color CCD linear image sensor can be used as the imaging device.
  • CCD is an abbreviation for Charge-Coupled Device and refers to a charge coupled device.
  • CMOS linear image sensor can be used.
  • CMOS is an abbreviation for Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor and refers to a complementary metal oxide semiconductor.
  • the scanner 44 may include, in addition to the imaging device, an illumination optical system that illuminates a reading target and a signal processing circuit that processes a signal obtained from the imaging device and generates digital image data.
  • the scanner 44 is arranged on the downstream side of the inkjet head 43K located on the most downstream side in the transport direction of the paper P among the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K.
  • the scanner 44 reads an image on the paper P while the paper P is being conveyed by the image forming drum 41.
  • the image on the paper P is read.
  • a defective nozzle detection pattern for inspecting the ejection state of each nozzle in addition to the image to be printed specified in the print job, a test pattern for correcting print density, and for correcting print density unevenness Test patterns and other various test patterns can be included.
  • the print image is inspected based on the read image data read by the scanner 44, and it is determined whether there is an abnormality in image quality. Further, based on the read image data read by the scanner 44, it is possible to obtain information such as the density of the print image and ejection defects of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K.
  • the ink drying unit 50 heats the paper P after image formation to dry the ink.
  • the ink drying unit 50 includes a first chain delivery 51, a second paper guide 52, and a first heating device 53.
  • the first chain delivery 51 conveys the paper P received from the image forming drum 41 along a predetermined conveyance path, and delivers it to the varnish application drum 61.
  • the first chain delivery 51 includes a pair of endless chains that travel along a certain travel route, and grips the leading edge of the paper P with a gripper (not shown) that spans the pair of chains. Is transported along a certain transport path.
  • the second paper guide 52 guides the travel of the paper P conveyed by the first chain delivery 51.
  • the second paper guide 52 has a hollow board shape and has a flat guide surface along the paper P conveyance path.
  • the paper P is conveyed while sliding on the guide surface of the second paper guide 52.
  • the guide surface of the second paper guide 52 has a number of suction holes (not shown).
  • the sheet P slides on the guide surface of the second sheet guide 52 while being sucked from the suction hole. Thereby, the paper P can be conveyed while applying tension to the paper P.
  • the first heating device 53 heats the image surface of the paper P conveyed by the first chain delivery 51 to dry the ink.
  • the first heating device 53 is configured by arranging a plurality of rod-shaped heaters at regular intervals along the conveyance direction of the paper P. Each heater is disposed orthogonal to the conveyance direction of the paper P.
  • a halogen heater or an infrared heater is used as the heater.
  • the first heating device 53 may include a blowing unit such as a fan or a blower. In the first heating device 53, the drying intensity indicating the strength of drying is adjusted by the number of lighting heaters and / or the lighting duty ratio.
  • the image surface of the paper P is heated by the first heating device 53, and the ink is dried.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 includes a first temperature detection unit 56 in order to appropriately control ink drying conditions in the ink drying unit 50.
  • the first temperature detection unit 56 detects the temperature of the paper P that has been dried using the first heating device 53.
  • the temperature of the paper P detected using the first temperature detection unit 56 is, for example, the surface temperature of the paper P.
  • a non-contact temperature sensor can be used for the first temperature detection unit 56.
  • the first temperature detection unit 56 is disposed downstream of the first heating device 53 in the paper conveyance path and at a position before the paper P is delivered to the varnish application unit 60. Based on the temperature information detected using the first temperature detection unit 56, the operation of the first heating device 53 is controlled.
  • the varnish application unit 60 applies varnish to the image surface of the paper P after image formation.
  • the varnish used in this embodiment is an aqueous varnish.
  • An aqueous varnish is a water-soluble varnish.
  • the varnish application unit 60 includes a varnish application drum 61 and a varnish coater 90.
  • the varnish application drum 61 receives the paper P from the first chain delivery 51, transports the received paper P along a certain transport path, and delivers it to the second chain delivery 71.
  • the varnish application drum 61 is conveyed by winding the paper P around the peripheral surface by gripping and rotating the leading end of the paper P with a gripper (not shown) provided on the peripheral surface of the drum.
  • Examples of the configuration of the varnish coater 90 include a configuration including a varnish tank, a drawing roller, a measuring blade, one or more intermediate transfer rollers, and a varnish application roller.
  • the configuration of the varnish coater 90 is not particularly limited, and may include a doctor chamber and a varnish application roller.
  • the varnish application roller When varnishing the paper P after image formation, the varnish application roller is pressed against the image forming surface (first surface) in the process of being conveyed to the varnish application drum 61 and the varnish is applied to the image forming surface. Applied.
  • the varnish post-processing unit 70 performs post-processing of the varnish applied to the image surface of the paper P by the varnish application unit 60.
  • a heat drying process is performed as a post-treatment of the varnish.
  • the heat drying process here is a process of heating the image surface of the paper P coated with varnish to dry the varnish, that is, a process of volatilizing moisture or solvent in the varnish. Thereby, the stickiness of the surface of a varnish layer is suppressed and generation
  • the varnish post-processing unit 70 includes a second chain delivery 71, a third paper guide 72, and a second heating device 70A.
  • the second chain delivery 71 receives the paper P from the varnish application drum 61, transports the received paper P along a certain transport path, and discharges it at the paper discharge position.
  • the second chain delivery 71 includes a pair of endless chains that travel along a certain travel route, and grips the leading end of the paper P with a gripper (not shown) that is stretched over the pair of chains. Is transported along a certain transport path.
  • the third paper guide 72 guides the travel of the paper P conveyed by the second chain delivery 71.
  • the third paper guide 72 has a hollow board shape and has a flat guide surface along the paper P conveyance path.
  • the paper P is conveyed while sliding on the guide surface of the third paper guide 72.
  • the guide surface of the third paper guide 72 has a number of suction holes. The sheet P slides on the guide surface while being sucked from the suction hole. Thereby, the paper P can be conveyed while applying tension to the paper P.
  • the second heating device 70A heats the image surface of the paper P conveyed by the second chain delivery 71, and dries the varnish applied to the image surface.
  • a configuration similar to that of the first heating device 53 can be applied to the second heating device 70A.
  • the sheet P coated with the aqueous varnish is heated by the second heating device 70A in the process of being conveyed by the second chain delivery 71, and the coated varnish is dried.
  • the varnish post-processing unit 70 may include a cooling processing unit (not shown) that cools the varnish applied to the paper P.
  • a cooling processing unit a configuration in which a blower fan is provided can be given.
  • the viscosity of the varnish can be increased.
  • the ink solvent is prevented from being mixed into the varnish, and the stickiness of the varnish can be suppressed.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 includes a second temperature detection unit 94 in order to appropriately control the varnish drying conditions in the varnish post-processing unit 70.
  • the second temperature detection unit 94 detects the temperature of the paper P after the varnish post-processing is performed using the second heating device 70A.
  • the temperature of the paper P detected using the second temperature detection unit 94 is, for example, the surface temperature of the paper P.
  • a non-contact temperature sensor can be used for the second temperature detection unit 94.
  • the second temperature detection unit 94 is disposed at a position downstream of the second heating device 70A on the downstream side of the sheet conveyance path and in front of the stacking unit 80. Based on the temperature information detected using the second temperature detector 94, the operation of the second heating device 70A is controlled.
  • the stacking unit 80 stacks the discharged paper P.
  • the stacking unit 80 includes a stacking device 81.
  • the stacking device 81 receives the paper P released from the second chain delivery 71 at a predetermined paper discharge position, and stacks and collects the paper P on the paper discharge table.
  • the ink jet printing apparatus 1 includes a powder spray unit 96.
  • the powder spraying unit 96 sprays the powder onto the paper P stacked on the stacking unit 80.
  • the powder is a powder having a blocking deterrent effect.
  • an anti-blocking powder used in the printing field can be used.
  • the powder is sometimes referred to as an “antiblocking agent”.
  • the powder may be either inorganic particles or organic particles.
  • particles of a material selected from the group consisting of starch coated with a silicone resin, silica, acrylic resin, styrene resin, silicone resin, and metal oxide are preferable.
  • acrylic resins include polymethyl acrylate and polymethyl methacrylate.
  • styrene resin is polystyrene.
  • metal oxides include titanium oxide, magnesium oxide, and aluminum oxide.
  • the ink used for inkjet image formation has a higher water content than the ink used in printing methods other than the inkjet method. Therefore, in the ink jet printing apparatus 1, it is preferable that the powder is hydrophobic in order to increase the abrasion resistance of the printed matter and prevent the occurrence of image defects in the image.
  • a powder subjected to hydrophobic treatment such as starch coated with a silicone resin is more preferable.
  • the powder spraying unit 96 shown in FIG. The powder spraying unit 96 sprays the powder onto the paper P before being stacked on the stacking unit 80 or onto the paper P after being placed on the stacking unit 80.
  • a powder spray nozzle that is used as a powder applying means in the printing field can be applied to the powder spray unit 96.
  • a powder spraying part 96 As the powder spraying part 96, a blower type or an electronic spraying type can be applied.
  • the adhesive force due to the stickiness of the surface of the varnish applied to the image surface after the image formation is gradually reduced as the solvent escapes from the varnish layer over time.
  • the load applied to the varnish surface of the paper located in the lowermost layer in the stack of paper in the stack increases as the stack speed increases and / or as the paper basis weight increases, the load increasing speed increases.
  • the load increase rate means an amount of increase in load applied to the paper per unit time.
  • the basis weight means the mass of paper per unit area. The basis weight is usually expressed by the mass of paper per square meter, and the unit of “g / m 2 ” is used. As the paper is heavier, the paper thickness tends to increase, so the basis weight is used in the same meaning as “paper thickness”.
  • FIG. 2 is a graph illustrating the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper when the printed matter coated with the aqueous varnish is stacked.
  • the horizontal axis indicates the elapsed time from the start of stacking.
  • the vertical axis represents adhesive force or load.
  • a graph G1 that descends to the right represents the behavior of the adhesive force due to the stickiness of the varnish.
  • the vertical axis of FIG. 2 represents “adhesive strength”.
  • a graph G2 that rises to the right shows an increasing behavior of the load due to the stack.
  • the vertical axis in FIG. 2 represents “load”.
  • a graph G3 indicated by a thick solid line shows the behavior of the adhesive force between the varnish surface and the paper back surface.
  • a horizontal graph G4 indicated by a broken line represents an allowable adhesive force.
  • the vertical axis of FIG. 2 represents “adhesive strength”.
  • Blocking does not occur if the adhesive strength between the varnish surface and the paper is less than the allowable adhesive strength. When the adhesive force between the varnish surface and the paper exceeds the allowable adhesive force, blocking occurs.
  • the load increasing speed is represented by the magnitude of the slope of the graph G2.
  • the speed at which the adhesive force due to the stickiness of the varnish decreases is represented by the magnitude of the slope of the graph G1.
  • the graph G1 is a downward-sloping graph, and the slope has a negative value, but the magnitude of the slope is represented by the absolute value of the slope.
  • FIG. 3 is a graph of another example showing the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case where the printed matter coated with the aqueous varnish is stacked.
  • the notation rules of the horizontal axis, the vertical axis, and the graphs G1, G2, G3, and G4 in FIG. 3 are the same as those in FIG.
  • FIG. 4 is a graph of another example showing the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case where the printed matter coated with the aqueous varnish is stacked.
  • the notation rules of the horizontal axis, vertical axis, and graphs G1, G2, G3, and G4 in FIG. 4 are the same as those in FIG.
  • the stack speed is the number of stacks per unit time.
  • the stack speed correlates with the speed at which the load applied to the lowermost sheet of the stack bundle increases per unit time.
  • a means for coping with the problem shown in FIG. 3 will be described.
  • the ink jet printing apparatus 1 includes a sheet type of paper used for printing, a varnish type of water-based varnish, an ink amount of ink used for image formation, and a powder having a blocking deterrent effect applied in an accumulation portion.
  • the stack speed V indicates the number of printed products stacked per unit time.
  • the stack speed is determined by the paper feed speed and / or the print speed setting in the inkjet printing apparatus 1.
  • the specific stack speed is, for example, a stack speed set by the print mode.
  • the specific stack speed may be specified by the user.
  • the stack allowable number X is an allowable value of the number of sheets that can be stacked without stacking when printing is stacked at the stack speed V.
  • the stack allowable number X may be understood as a stackable number of sheets that can be stacked without blocking at the stack speed V, or an upper limit number of stacks without blocking at the stack speed V.
  • the stack allowable number X may vary depending on the combination of printing conditions.
  • the stack allowable number X is determined from a combination of two or more conditions among the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount.
  • the method of determining the allowable stack number X is performed using a calculation table prepared in advance as follows, for example.
  • FIG. 5 is a chart showing an example of a calculation table used for calculating the allowable stack number X.
  • the calculation table illustrated in FIG. 5 is a table in which the value of the allowable stack number X for a combination of a plurality of conditions regarding the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount is defined.
  • the calculation table shown in FIG. 5 is an example of a first calculation table.
  • four types of paper types, two types of varnish types, three types of ink amounts, and two types of powder amounts are illustrated, but the types of the condition items shown in the chart of FIG.
  • the division is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the paper type is an example of a medium type.
  • Basis weight is the mass of paper per unit area, and is generally expressed in units of “g / m 2 ” grams per square meter. “G / m 2 ” may be expressed as “GSM (grams per square meter)”. The notations “large basis weight” and “small basis weight” indicate the relative size relationship of the basis weight.
  • the ink amount indicates the amount of ink applied to the paper for printing an image.
  • the ink amount can be estimated by calculation from image information to be printed.
  • the ink amount may be evaluated by the total amount of ink applied to the paper, or may be evaluated by the amount of ink per unit area.
  • the notation “large”, “medium”, or “small” of the ink amount represents a relative quantitative relationship of the ink amount.
  • “None” in the table shown in FIG. 5 corresponds to the powder spray amount being “0”.
  • the powder “present” means that a predetermined amount of powder is sprayed.
  • the prescribed amount is determined as a spray amount that effectively obtains a blocking suppression effect.
  • “Present” of the powder corresponds to the spray amount of the powder being a specified amount.
  • the concept of the amount of powder includes whether or not powder is used.
  • the condition of the amount of powder is not limited to two types of powder “Yes” and “No”, but may be classified into multiple stages depending on the amount of powder spray.
  • the amount of powder may be evaluated by the amount of powder sprayed per unit time, or may be evaluated by the amount of powder sprayed per unit area of the paper. Spraying a prescribed amount of powder is an example of applying powder under predetermined conditions. “None” of powder corresponds to applying powder under the condition that the amount of powder is “zero”.
  • the calculation table as illustrated in FIG. 5 can be created based on the experimental results based on combinations of various conditions. That is, it is possible to conduct an experiment using a combination of various conditions including the stack speed condition, and to predetermine an appropriate X value for the combination of various conditions.
  • the calculation table is associated with the stack speed condition.
  • the calculation table illustrated in FIG. 5 is a calculation table related to the stack speed V.
  • the data of the calculation table is stored in a storage medium such as a memory and can be read out as necessary.
  • the data of the calculation table that defines the X value for each combination of the items relating to the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount is stored in the inkjet printing apparatus in advance, and the user From the combination of two or more of the paper type, varnish type, image information, and powder amount conditions to be specified, the calculation table is referenced to identify the combination most suitable for the specified condition and determine the X value.
  • the ink amount can be estimated by calculation from image information to be printed.
  • the data stored in the calculation table may be read and used as it is, or the specified condition can be used by performing extrapolation (extrapolation) or interpolation (interpolation) using the data in the calculation table.
  • An X value suitable for the combination may be calculated.
  • a stacking method of stacking Y printed materials may be employed.
  • a stack method in which printed products are simply stacked at a set stack speed V to form a single stack bundle is referred to as a “standard stack method”.
  • the standard stack method is an example of a first stack method.
  • the ink jet printing apparatus 1 executes printing at a set stack speed V when Y ⁇ X, and stacks the paper P on the stacking unit 80 by a standard stack method.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 presents at least one countermeasure for suppressing the occurrence of blocking to the user.
  • a countermeasure that can realize printing of the designated number of printed sheets and suppress the occurrence of blocking is referred to as a “blocking suppression measure”.
  • the blocking suppression measure implements a stack method that results in a stack operation different from the standard stack method.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a part of functions realized by the control device of the inkjet printing apparatus.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 is a printing system that includes a printing apparatus main body 1 ⁇ / b> A and a control apparatus 100.
  • the printing apparatus main body 1A indicates the mechanical structure of the inkjet printing apparatus 1 described in FIG.
  • the printing apparatus main body 1 ⁇ / b> A includes a conveyance unit 5 for paper P, a paper feeding unit 10, an image forming unit 40, a varnish application unit 60, and a stacking unit 80.
  • the transport unit 5 refers to a transport mechanism that forms a transport path of the paper P as a whole of the inkjet printing apparatus 1 from the paper feed unit 10 to the stacking unit 80.
  • the conveyance unit 5 includes the feeder board 12, the feed drum 13, the processing liquid application drum 21, the processing liquid drying drum 31, the image forming drum 41, the first chain delivery 51, the varnish application drum 61, and the second illustrated in FIG. Includes chain delivery 71.
  • the printing apparatus main body 1A includes the processing liquid application unit 20, the processing liquid drying unit 30, the ink drying unit 50, the varnish post-processing unit 70, and the powder spray shown in FIG. Part 96 is included.
  • the control device 100 controls the overall operation of the inkjet printing apparatus 1.
  • the control device 100 can be realized by a combination of computer hardware and software.
  • the control device 100 can be realized using one or a plurality of computers.
  • the control device 100 includes a stack allowable number determination unit 102, a calculation table storage unit 104, a blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106, an information presentation unit 108, a selection instruction receiving unit 110, and a blocking countermeasure control unit 112. Prepare.
  • the stack allowable number determination unit 102 performs processing for acquiring information on printing conditions and determining the stack allowable number X.
  • the information on the printing conditions includes information on the paper type used for printing, the varnish type of the aqueous varnish, and the powder amount conditions. Further, the print condition information may include image information to be printed and information on the number of prints Y designated as the number of prints.
  • the image information to be printed may be, for example, image data indicating a digital image for printing.
  • Image data can be used as information for evaluating the amount of ink used to form an image.
  • the control device 100 includes an ink amount calculation unit (not shown) that calculates the ink amount of ink used for image formation from image data to be printed. Information on the ink amount calculated by the ink amount calculation unit is provided to the stack allowable number determination unit 102. Alternatively, the stack allowable number determination unit 102 may include an ink amount calculation unit.
  • the stack allowable number determination unit 102 stacks at a specific stack speed V without blocking from a combination of two or more conditions among the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount in the acquired printing conditions.
  • the allowable stack number X is determined.
  • the stack allowable number determination unit 102 determines the stack allowable number X using the calculation table 105.
  • the calculation table storage unit 104 is a storage device that stores data of the calculation table 105.
  • the calculation table 105 is, for example, the calculation table illustrated in FIG.
  • the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 compares the stack allowable number X determined by the stack allowable number determination unit 102 with the print number Y designated as the number of sheets to be printed, and the print number Y becomes the stack allowable number X. If so, signal processing to present at least one blocking suppression measure is performed.
  • the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 performs, for example, signal processing for generating a display signal representing a blocking suppression measure.
  • the signal generated by the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 may include an audio signal, a vibration signal, and other signals that stimulate the user's perception.
  • the information presentation unit 108 includes an information output device for presenting at least one blocking suppression measure to the user.
  • the information output device is, for example, a display device.
  • an audio output device and / or a vibration generator may be included.
  • the selection instruction receiving unit 110 is a user interface that receives an input of a selection instruction from the user regarding adoption of at least one blocking suppression measure presented to the information presentation unit 108.
  • the selection instruction receiving unit 110 includes, for example, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, operation buttons, or an appropriate combination thereof.
  • the selection instruction receiving unit 110 may include a voice input device that inputs a user instruction by voice.
  • the user determines whether or not the blocking prevention measure presented on the information presenting unit 108 is adopted, and inputs a selection instruction including an instruction on whether or not to adopt the blocking suppression measure from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
  • the user When only one blocking suppression measure is presented to the information presenting unit 108, the user inputs an instruction to accept or reject the presented blocking suppression measure from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
  • the user inputs an instruction for specifying a blocking suppression measure to be adopted from among the plurality of candidates from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
  • the instruction that specifies the blocking suppression measure to be adopted includes an instruction that indicates that a blocking suppression measure other than the specification is not adopted.
  • the user can input an instruction to the effect that none of the plurality of blocking suppression measure candidates presented on the information presentation unit 108 is adopted from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
  • the instruction input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110 is sent to the blocking countermeasure control unit 112.
  • the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 controls the execution of the blocking suppression policy in accordance with the instruction input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
  • the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 controls the operation of the printing apparatus main body 1A and controls the stack operation.
  • the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 performs control to change the stack method in the stacking unit 80.
  • the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 may perform control including a change in the sheet conveyance speed by the conveyance unit 5 or a change in the sheet feeding speed from the sheet feeding unit 10.
  • the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 may control the entire printing operation of the printing apparatus main body 1 ⁇ / b> A including the conveyance unit 5, the paper feeding unit 10, the image forming unit 40, the varnish application unit 60, and the stacking unit 80.
  • the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 is an example of a control unit.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 may have a device configuration necessary for implementing a blocking suppression measure that can be presented to the information presenting unit 108 in advance. Changes may be made.
  • the change in the device configuration necessary for implementing the blocking suppression measure may be, for example, replacement of a part or all of the stacking device in the stacking unit 80, addition of the stacking device, or attachment or removal of an accessory unit.
  • the control device 100 is an example of a print control device.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the control device 100.
  • the flowchart of FIG. 7 shows a procedure of processing for determining a stack method.
  • step S101 the control device 100 acquires at least two pieces of information among the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount used for printing.
  • the information acquired by the control device 100 preferably includes at least varnish type information.
  • the information acquired by the control device 100 includes powder amount information in addition to the varnish type information.
  • information on each condition of paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount is acquired.
  • the information regarding the plurality of conditions may be acquired at the same time or may be acquired with a time difference. Step S101 is an example of an information acquisition process.
  • step S102 the control device 100 acquires information on the stack speed V.
  • the stack speed V may be a fixed value set in advance or may be a value appropriately set by the user.
  • step S103 the control device 100 determines the stack allowable number X.
  • the processing in step S103 is performed by the stack allowable number determination unit 102.
  • Step S103 is an example of a stack allowable number determination process.
  • step S104 the control device 100 acquires information on the number of printed sheets Y.
  • step S104 may be performed before step S103, and the execution order of step S101, step S102, and step S104 is not limited to the example shown in FIG.
  • step S105 the control device 100 compares the print number Y with the stack allowable number X, and determines whether or not Y> X is satisfied. When determining that Y ⁇ X in the determination step of step S105, the control device 100 proceeds to step S110.
  • step S110 the control device 100 determines the stacking method of the stacking unit 80 as the standard stacking method.
  • step S105 when the control device 100 determines that Y> X in the determination step of step S105, the process proceeds to step S106.
  • step S106 the control device 100 presents at least one blocking suppression measure to the information presentation unit 108.
  • Step S106 is an example of an information presentation process.
  • the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 of the control device 100 performs the processing from step S104 to step S106.
  • step S107 the control device 100 accepts a selection instruction from the user.
  • the control device 100 receives an input of an instruction for selecting whether to adopt at least one blocking suppression measure presented to the information presenting unit 108.
  • the user can input a selection instruction from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
  • step S108 the control device 100 determines whether or not a selection instruction is input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110. If there is no input of the selection instruction from selection instruction receiving unit 110, control device 100 returns to step S107 and waits for the input of the instruction.
  • step S108 when the control device 100 determines that a selection instruction is input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110, the control apparatus 100 proceeds to step S109.
  • step S109 the control device 100 determines whether or not the selection instruction input by the user has selected a blocking suppression measure.
  • the control device 100 determines in the determination process of step S109 that the user has input an instruction to select a blocking suppression measure, the control device 100 proceeds to step S111.
  • step S111 the control device 100 determines the stacking method of the printed matter as a stacking method (corresponding to the second stacking method) for performing the stacking operation of the blocking suppression measure selected by the user.
  • step S109 determines in step S109 that the user has input an instruction not to adopt the blocking suppression measure
  • the control device 100 proceeds to step S110 and determines the print stacking method to be the standard stacking method.
  • the stack method is determined in step S110 or step S111, and the flowchart of FIG.
  • step S110 or step S111 printing is performed according to the stacking method determined in step S110 or step S111, and the printed material is stacked on the stacking unit 80.
  • the control method including processing according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 7 is an example of a print control method.
  • Example 1 of blocking prevention measures >> Hereinafter, an example of a blocking suppression measure will be described.
  • Example 1 of the blocking suppression measure is that when the number of printed sheets Y is larger than the stack allowable number X, printing is performed at a stack speed V, and when the number of stacked sheets reaches X, the first stack bundle that is stacked X sheets Apart from that, it is a strategy to newly stack the second stack bundle.
  • FIG. 8 is a conceptual diagram of a strategy for newly stacking a stack bundle for every X stack bundles when the number of printed sheets is Y.
  • the number of stack bundles when stack stacks are newly stacked for every X stacks which is the allowable number of stacks, is the quotient +1 when Y is divided by X.
  • the number of stack bundles is a quotient when Y is divided by X.
  • N is an integer of 1 or more.
  • Z is an integer of 0 or more.
  • N 1, Z is an integer of 1 or more.
  • Z can be an integer greater than or equal to 0 when N> 2.
  • ⁇ Specific example 1-1> As a specific example corresponding to the blocking suppression example 1, for example, when X stack bundles are stacked, a partition member is inserted above the first stack bundle loaded with X sheets, and the partition member is placed on the partition member. The second stack bundle is newly stacked, and thereafter, similarly, the third stack bundle, the fourth stack bundle, etc. are stacked while inserting the partition members in units of X. Can be adopted.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically illustrating a specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 1 of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of an accumulation device 81A employed in the accumulation unit 80 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1.
  • the stacking apparatus 81A shown in FIG. 9 has a sheet discharge table 82, and can insert a partition member 83 for every X stack bundles, and stack a new stack bundle on the partition member 83. It has become.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 including the stacking device 81A stacks X printed materials on the paper discharge tray 82 to form the first stack bundle Sb1, and then, above the first stack bundle Sb1,
  • the partition member 83 is arranged, and the second stack bundle Sb2 is newly stacked on the partition member 83.
  • the partition member 83 is disposed above the first stack bundle Sb1 and at a position away from the first stack bundle Sb1 so that the weight of the second stack bundle Sb2 is not applied to the first stack bundle Sb1.
  • a partition member 83 is disposed above the stack bundle, and a third stack bundle is newly stacked. This operation is repeated to stack N bundles or N + 1 bundles.
  • the accumulation device 81A preferably includes a mechanism for automatically inserting the partition member 83 every time X stacks are stacked.
  • the control device 100 controls the insertion operation of the partition member 83.
  • the first stack bundle loaded with X sheets is retreated from the stack position to another retreat position, and the second stack bundle is newly loaded, Thereafter, similarly, the stack bundle is formed in units of X, and the operation of evacuating the formed stack bundle is repeated to load the third stack bundle, the fourth stack bundle, and so on.
  • a configuration may be employed.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing another specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 1 of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic side view of the stacking device 81B employed in the stacking unit 80 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1. As shown in FIG. 10, the accumulation device 81 ⁇ / b> B is disposed below the second chain delivery 71. In the stacking device 81 ⁇ / b> B, a discharge tray portion is configured using a belt conveyor 85. In FIG. 10, the stack position is the leftmost stack area in the belt conveyor 85.
  • FIG. 10 shows a state in which the first stack bundle Sb1 and the second stack bundle Sb2 are sequentially moved by the belt conveyor 85 to the retreat position in the right direction in FIG. In FIG. 10, the third stack bundle Sb3 is stacked at the stack position.
  • the belt conveyor 85 in FIG. 10 has a belt length that allows each of the three stack bundles Sb1 to Sb3 including the stack position to be placed at different positions on the belt conveyor.
  • the belt length of the belt conveyor 85 is not limited to the example of FIG. Moreover, the form which uses combining a some belt conveyor is also possible.
  • the control device 100 controls the driving of the belt conveyor 85 by counting the number of stacks.
  • the belt conveyor 85 is an example of a stack bundle retracting mechanism.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the first example of the blocking suppression measure.
  • a stacking device 81C including a rotary discharge tray illustrated in FIG. 11 may be employed.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic plan view of the accumulation device 81C.
  • an accumulation device 81 ⁇ / b> C is disposed below the second chain delivery 71.
  • the stacking device 81C includes a turntable 86 that functions as a paper discharge table and a stack bundle retracting mechanism.
  • the turntable 86 has a plurality of stack areas 86A on which a plurality of stack bundles can be placed. Each of the plurality of stack areas 86A is indicated by a dashed rectangle.
  • Each of the plurality of stack areas 86A functions as a sheet discharge table.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates the turntable 86 having eight stack areas 86A, but the number of stack areas 86A is not limited to the example of FIG.
  • the number of stack areas 86A can be designed to be an arbitrary number of 2 or more.
  • the turntable 86 can be rotated using a drive device (not shown).
  • a drive device not shown.
  • the turntable 86 is rotated, the position of the stack area 86A where the stack bundles are stacked is moved, and the stack bundle is retracted. All positions in the stack area 86A other than the stack position SP correspond to the retreat positions.
  • the stacking device 81C shown in FIG. 11 a maximum of eight stack bundles can be stacked.
  • Example 2 of blocking prevention measures is that when the number of printed sheets Y is larger than the stack allowable number X, printing is performed at the stacking speed V, the stack bundle is stacked on the stacking unit 80, and the stack number reaches X sheets. This is a measure for temporarily stopping printing and restarting printing after a predetermined time T has elapsed to continue stacking in the same stack bundle.
  • the specified time T is a standby time in which printing is paused and waited so as to realize a stack without occurrence of blocking when stacks of stacks exceeding the stack allowable number X are stacked.
  • FIG. 12 is an image diagram in a case where printing is stopped every time the number of stacks reaches X, printing is resumed after a lapse of a specified time T, and stacking is continued in the same (single) stack bundle. .
  • the reason for waiting for the elapse of the specified time T is to stop printing for every X sheets, and reduce the stickiness of the varnish film without causing blocking, and (X ⁇ 2) sheets, (X This is to withstand the load of ( ⁇ 3), (X ⁇ 4),.
  • Specified time T is determined from a combination of two or more conditions among paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount, as in the case of stack allowable number X.
  • the method for determining the prescribed time T is performed using a calculation table prepared in advance as follows, for example.
  • FIG. 13 is a chart showing an example of a calculation table used for calculating the specified time T.
  • the calculation table illustrated in FIG. 13 is a table in which the value of the stack allowable number X and the specified time T are specified for a combination of a plurality of conditions regarding the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount.
  • the calculation table illustrated in FIG. 13 is obtained by adding the value of the specified time T to the calculation table illustrated in FIG.
  • the stack allowable number X and the specified time T can be calculated.
  • the calculation table illustrated in FIG. 13 is an example of a second calculation table.
  • FIG. 13 four types of paper types, two types of varnish types, three types of ink amounts, and two types of powder amounts are illustrated, but the types of the condition items shown in the chart of FIG. The division is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating functions provided in the ink jet printing apparatus 1 that implements the blocking suppression example 2. 14, elements that are the same as or similar to those in the configuration shown in FIG. 6 are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
  • the control device 100 includes a specified time determination unit 103.
  • the calculation table storage unit 104 for example, a calculation table as illustrated in FIG.
  • the specified time determination unit 103 selects a specific stack on the stack bundle that has reached the stack allowable number X from a combination of two or more conditions among the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount in the acquired printing conditions. A prescribed time T that can be stacked without occurrence of blocking at a speed V is determined. The specified time determination unit 103 determines the specified time T using the calculation table 105 as shown in FIG.
  • the allowable stack number determining unit 102 determines the allowable stack number X using the calculation table 105 as shown in FIG.
  • the allowable stack number determining unit 102 and the specified time determining unit 103 are configured as an allowable stack number and specified time determining unit 114 having both the function of the allowable stack number determining unit 102 and the function of the specified time determining unit 103. May be.
  • the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 may include information on the specified time T in the information to be presented.
  • the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 controls the stop and restart of printing based on the allowable stack number X determined by the allowable stack number determining unit 102 and the specified time T determined by the specified time determining unit 103.
  • the control device 100 manages the number of stacks in the stacking unit 80, temporarily stops printing for every X sheets, and resumes printing after the lapse of the specified time T.
  • Example 1 When the measure described as the blocking suppression measure example 1 is applied and a new stack bundle is stacked for each stack allowable number X with respect to the print number Y, the number of stack bundles becomes 3 or more.
  • a configuration may be adopted in which any of the third and subsequent stack bundles is stacked on the first stack bundle that has already been retracted to the retracted position after the number of stacks of the first stack bundle reaches X.
  • a specified time T has elapsed from the end of X stacks for the first stack bundle. . That is, any of the third and subsequent stack bundles can be stacked on the first stack bundle that has passed the specified time T from the end of the X stacks of the first stack bundle.
  • the third stack bundle is stacked on the first stack bundle.
  • the third stack bundle is separated from the first and second stack bundles. , Pile up new.
  • the fourth stack bundle is stacked on the first stack bundle.
  • the stack bundle can be stacked on the stack bundle after the lapse of the specified time T from the end of the stack of each stack bundle.
  • the first stack bundle corresponds to the first stack bundle.
  • the second stack bundle corresponds to the second stack bundle.
  • the third stack bundle or the fourth stack bundle corresponds to the third and subsequent stack bundles.
  • Example 3 of blocking prevention measures is a measure for reducing the stack speed to VA, which is lower than V, when the number of printed sheets Y is larger than the stack allowable number X.
  • V A is a stack speed at which Y or more stacks are possible without blocking.
  • the changed stack speed V A is calculated using, for example, the following equation.
  • means for changing the stack speed there may be a form of changing the paper conveyance speed by the conveyance unit 5.
  • the means for changing the stack speed there may be a form of changing the paper feed time interval in the paper feed unit 10. Specifically, for example, with respect to the time interval of the paper feed timing for realizing the stack speed V, the paper feed is thinned out at a constant rate of every other paper, and the paper feed time interval is made an integral multiple of twice or more. To do.
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating functions provided in the ink jet printing apparatus 1 that implements the third example of the blocking suppression measure. 15, elements that are the same as or similar to those shown in FIG. 6 are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
  • the control device 100 includes a stack speed determination unit 117 and a stack speed control unit 118.
  • the stack speed determining unit 117 determines a stack speed at which stacking can be performed for the number of printed sheets Y or more without blocking.
  • the stack speed determining unit 117 determines the stack speed VA based on the allowable stack number X determined by the allowable stack number determining unit 102, the designated print number Y, and the set stack speed V.
  • the stack speed control unit 118 controls the stack speed of the printing apparatus main body 1A according to the stack speed V A determined by the stack speed determination unit 117.
  • the stack speed control unit 118 controls the paper transport speed of the transport unit 5 so as to be the stack speed V A.
  • the stack speed control unit 118 controls the paper feed time interval from the paper feed unit 10 so that the stack speed VA is reached.
  • the paper supply time interval from the paper supply unit 10 is an example of a medium supply time interval for supplying a medium to the image forming unit.
  • the stack speed determination unit 117 and the stack speed control unit 118 may be included as functions of the blocking countermeasure control unit 112.
  • Example 4 of blocking prevention measures when the number of printed sheets Y is larger than the stack allowable number X, the stacking unit 80 divides the number of small copies into a smaller number of sheets than the stack allowable number X and holds the number of small copies for a certain time. later, by the stack, the without stackable number occurrence of blocking is increased to X a Like the X Like a measure to form a stack bundle of stacked sheets exceeding the stack allowable number X.
  • X A is an integer greater than X.
  • the time required for the final stacking can be extended by stacking after being divided into small parts and held for a certain period of time. For this reason, the number of stack bundles that can be formed at one time is larger than X.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically illustrating a specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 4 of the blocking suppression measure.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a stacking device 81D employed in the stacking unit 80 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1.
  • the stacking device 81D includes a plurality of mobile storage shelves 87 that can store a small number of sheets.
  • the stacking device 81D has a structure in which a plurality of storage shelves 87 can be moved cyclically by a moving mechanism (not shown) to which a mechanism principle such as a so-called tower type parking lot is applied.
  • a moving mechanism not shown
  • FIG. 16 an example of the stacking device 81D having eight storage shelves 87 is shown.
  • Each of the eight storage shelves 87 is shown with an A to G identification symbol.
  • Each of the storage shelves 87 can store a small number of printed material bundles that are a predetermined number of sheets.
  • the specified number is W.
  • the specified number W is an integer that is two or more and smaller than the stack allowable number X.
  • a guide 88 for guiding the printed material to the storage shelf 87 is disposed below the second chain delivery 71.
  • the guide 88 is disposed in an inclined state with respect to a horizontal plane so that a printed material released from a gripper (not shown) of the second chain delivery 71 slides along the guide 88.
  • One of the storage shelves 87 is disposed at the tip of the inclined guide 88.
  • the printed material that slides down along the guide 88 is stored in the storage shelf 87 ahead of the guide 88.
  • the storage shelf 87 is arranged in a state of being inclined substantially parallel to the inclination of the guide 88.
  • the position where the storage shelf 87 receives the printed material from the guide 88 is referred to as a “printed material receiving position”.
  • the storage shelf 87 set at the printed material receiving position is a storage shelf for the identification symbol A.
  • the printed material is stored in the storage shelf 87 set at the printed material receiving position.
  • the storage shelf 87 After storing a bundle of a predetermined number of printed materials in the storage shelf 87 set at the printed material receiving position, the storage shelf 87 is slid downward by one storage shelf in FIG. 16, and a new storage shelf 87 is set at the printed material receiving position. Thereafter, the bundle of the specified number W of printed materials is stored in the storage shelf 87 in the same manner.
  • the “new storage shelf” means a empty (empty) storage shelf in which printed matter is not stored.
  • the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A slides one storage shelf downward in FIG.
  • the storage rack 87 is also linked to move the position of each storage shelf in a cyclic manner, whereby the storage shelf 87 with the identification symbol B is set as a new storage shelf at the printed material receiving position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 16, when a specified number W of printed matter is stored in the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A, the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A is placed at the position of the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol H.
  • the storage shelf 87 for H is at the position of the storage shelf 87 for identification symbol G
  • the storage shelf 87 for identification symbol G is at the position of storage shelf 87 for identification symbol F
  • the storage shelf 87 for identification symbol F is the storage shelf for identification symbol E.
  • the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol E is sequentially moved to the location for the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol D at the position 87, and so on, and the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol B is set at the printed material receiving position.
  • the position of the lowermost storage shelf among the plurality of storage shelves 87 arranged side by side in the vertical direction in FIG. 16 from the printed material receiving position moves the bundle of printed materials from the storage shelf 87 to the paper discharge tray 82.
  • "Release position" For example, in FIG. 16, the position of the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol F corresponds to the “small copy retention release position”.
  • FIG. 17 schematically shows a stack of printed matter stored in the storage shelf 87 on the paper discharge tray 82.
  • the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A is set at the small copy retention release position. Printing is further continued from the state described in FIG. 16, a bundle of a predetermined number of printed materials is stored in each of the storage rack 87 for the identification symbol B and the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol C, and the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol D is stored.
  • the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A is set at the small copy holding release position.
  • the storage shelf 87 set at the small number holding release position performs a process of moving the stored bundle of printed materials to the paper discharge tray 82.
  • the means for transferring a bundle of printed materials from the storage shelf 87 to the paper discharge tray 82 may be configured to open the bottom surface of the storage shelf 87 and drop the printed materials, for example.
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory view schematically showing the operation of the integrated device 81D described in FIGS.
  • the storage shelves 87 for the identification symbols D, C, and B move downward in FIG.
  • the storage shelf 87 of the identification symbol E is set at the printed material receiving position.
  • the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A moves to another location not shown in FIG.
  • the storage shelf 87 set at the small copy retention release position releases the stored bundle of printed materials, and moves the bundle of printed materials to the paper discharge tray 82.
  • a bundle of a prescribed number of printed materials is an example of a bundle of media divided into small copies.
  • a bundle of a predetermined number of printed materials is held on the storage shelf 87 for a certain period of time and then stacked on the paper discharge tray 82.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the blocking suppression measure example 4.
  • FIG. 19A to 19D are image diagrams schematically showing the operation of the stacking device 81E employed in the stacking unit 80 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1.
  • FIG. In the stacking unit 80 as a means for dividing the printed material into small copies and holding it for a certain period of time, air is ejected from the side of the printed material to the position where the bundle of printed materials is restrained, and the bundle of printed materials is restrained by the ejected air Can be adopted.
  • the stacking device 81E includes a paper discharge tray 82 and an air injection device (not shown).
  • An arrow indicated by reference numeral 120 in FIG. 19 indicates the flow of air injected from an air injection device (not shown). For example, air is ejected from both sides of two opposing side surfaces among the four side surfaces corresponding to the four sides of the printed matter.
  • the bundle 122 of printed matter divided into a predetermined number of small copies is restrained in a state of floating in the air by the force of air 120.
  • three stages of air jets having different positions in the direction of gravity are performed from an air jet apparatus (not shown), and a bundle 122 of printed matter is obtained at each of the three restraint positions corresponding to the height positions of the air jets of each stage.
  • the number of stages of air injection that is, the number of restraining positions is not limited to the illustrated example, and may be one or more.
  • FIG. 19B shows a state in which the injection of the air 120 is stopped from the state of FIG.
  • An arrow indicated by a broken line indicates that the injection of the air 120 is stopped.
  • FIG. 19 shows a state where the injection of air 120 is resumed from the state of (B) in FIG.
  • FIG. 19C when the injection of the air 120 is resumed, the bundle 122 of printed matter that has moved downward due to gravity is restrained by the air 120 again.
  • FIG. 19B the bundle of printed matter 122 released from the restriction of the lowest air jet is stacked on the paper discharge table 82.
  • the new printed matter is restrained at the uppermost restraint position among the three restraint positions by the three-stage air injection shown in FIG.
  • the stacking apparatus 81E shown in FIG. 19 can be stacked by the standard stacking method by stopping air injection. For example, when the number of printed sheets Y is smaller than the allowable number of stacked sheets X, prints can be stacked on the paper discharge table 82 of the stacking apparatus 81E by the standard stacking method by not ejecting air.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the blocking suppression measure example 4.
  • FIG. 20A to 20D are image diagrams schematically showing the operation of the stacking device 81F employed in the stacking unit 80 in the ink jet printing apparatus 1.
  • FIG. A movable holding member that holds a bundle of printed matter of a small number of copies may be used as means for dividing the printed matter into small copies and holding the printed matter for a certain period of time in the stacking unit 80.
  • the 20 includes a paper discharge tray 82 and a plurality of movable holding members 89.
  • the holding member 89 can be moved to a holding position for holding the printed product bundle 122 and a non-holding position for holding the printed product bundle 122 by a driving mechanism (not shown).
  • the non-holding position is a position for releasing the holding state of the bundle 122 of printed matter.
  • FIG. 20A shows a state in which the holding member 89 is set at the holding position.
  • the bundle 122 of printed matter divided into a predetermined number of small copies is held by a holding member 89.
  • FIG. 20 shows an example in which three stages of holding members 89 having different positions in the gravity direction are arranged, and the bundle 122 of printed matter is restrained at each of the three restraining positions corresponding to the height positions of the holding members 89 at each stage.
  • the number of steps where the holding member 89 is arranged that is, the number of restraint positions is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be one or more.
  • FIG. 20B shows a state in which the holding member 89 is moved to the non-holding position from the state of FIG. 20A to release the holding state of the bundle 122 of printed matter.
  • FIG. 20 (C) shows a state in which the holding member 89 is returned to the holding position from the state of FIG. 20 (B).
  • the holding member 89 when the holding member 89 is returned to the holding position, the printed material bundle 122 moved downward by gravity is held by the holding member 89.
  • the bundle of printed matter 122 released from being held by the lowermost holding member 89 is stacked on the paper discharge table 82.
  • the new printed matter is restrained at the uppermost restraint position among the three restraint positions by the three-stage holding member 89 shown in FIG.
  • the stacking apparatus 81F shown in FIG. 20 can be stacked by the standard stacking method by holding the holding member 89 in the non-holding position.
  • the printed material is stacked on the discharge tray 82 of the stacking apparatus 81F by the standard stacking method by maintaining the holding member 89 in the non-holding position. Can do.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 may be configured to automatically switch the discharge destination of the printed material in conjunction with an input of a selection instruction for selecting whether or not to adopt a blocking suppression measure presented to the information presentation unit 108.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 includes a first paper discharge unit that collects printed materials by a first stacking method (standard stacking method), and a second discharge that collects printed materials by a second stacking method related to blocking prevention measures.
  • a first discharge path for guiding the printed matter to the first discharge portion, and a second discharge path for guiding the printed matter to the second discharge portion. Control may be performed to switch the paper discharge path in response to an instruction to select whether or not to adopt a blocking suppression measure specified by the user.
  • a plurality of paper discharge units and paper discharge paths corresponding to the second paper discharge unit and the second paper discharge path can be provided.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 discharges any unit of the stacking devices 81A, 81B, 81C, 81D, 81E, and 81F used for the implementation of the blocking suppression measure in response to the instruction to select whether or not to adopt the blocking suppression measure. Or a control system that can be retracted from the paper discharge position to the retreat position.
  • FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a control system of the inkjet printing apparatus 1.
  • the control device 100 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a RAM (Random Access Memory), a ROM (Read Only Memory), and the like.
  • a communication unit 201, an operation unit 202, a display unit 203, and a storage unit 204 are connected to the control device 100.
  • the communication unit 201 transmits / receives data to / from an external device such as a host computer (not shown).
  • the communication unit 201 includes a known communication interface.
  • the operation unit 202 includes an operation device such as operation buttons, a keyboard, a mouse, and a touch panel, a voice input device, or an appropriate combination thereof.
  • the control device 100 executes various processes according to information input from the operation unit 202.
  • the display unit 203 includes a display device (display) such as a liquid crystal panel.
  • the display unit 203 can display various information such as various setting information or abnormality information of the ink jet printing apparatus in accordance with a command from the control device 100.
  • the operation unit 202 and the display unit 203 constitute a user interface. The user can set various parameters and input and edit various information using the operation unit 202 while viewing the contents displayed on the screen of the display unit 203.
  • the operation unit 202 serves as the selection instruction receiving unit 110 described with reference to FIG.
  • the display unit 203 serves as the information presentation unit 108 described with reference to FIG.
  • the 21 is configured to include a storage device such as a hard disk device. Programs executed by the CPU of the control device 100 and various data necessary for control are stored in the ROM and / or the storage unit 204.
  • FIG. 22 is a block diagram of functions realized by the control device 100.
  • the same elements as those shown in FIGS. 1 and 6 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
  • the control device 100 includes a transport control unit 210, a paper feed control unit 211, a processing liquid application control unit 212, a processing liquid drying control unit 213, an image formation control unit 214, an ink drying control unit 215, a varnish. It functions as an application control unit 216, a varnish post-processing control unit 217, an accumulation control unit 218, a powder spray control unit 219, and a communication control unit 220.
  • the transport control unit 210 controls the transport unit 5 to control the transport of the paper P.
  • the conveyance control unit 210 controls driving of the conveyance means provided in each unit so that the paper P fed from the paper feeding unit 10 is conveyed at a constant speed.
  • the paper feed control unit 211 controls the paper feed unit 10 to control the paper feed of the paper P.
  • the paper feed control unit 211 controls driving of the components of the paper feed unit 10 so that the paper P set on the paper feed table is sequentially fed at a constant paper feed time interval.
  • the treatment liquid application control unit 212 controls the treatment liquid application unit 20 to control application of the treatment liquid to the paper P.
  • the treatment liquid application control unit 212 controls driving of the components of the treatment liquid application unit 20 so that the treatment liquid is applied to the conveyed paper P with a predetermined thickness.
  • the processing liquid drying control unit 213 controls the processing liquid drying unit 30 to control the drying of the processing liquid applied to the paper P.
  • the processing liquid drying control unit 213 controls driving of the components of the processing liquid drying unit 30 so that the processing liquid applied to the paper P is dried.
  • the image formation control unit 214 controls the image forming unit 40 to control image formation on the paper P.
  • the image forming control unit 214 controls driving of the components of the image forming unit 40 so that an image is formed on the conveyed paper P.
  • the ink drying control unit 215 controls the ink drying unit 50 to control ink drying.
  • the ink drying control unit 215 controls driving of the components of the ink drying unit 50 so that the ink applied to the paper P by the image forming unit 40 is dried.
  • the varnish application control unit 216 controls the varnish application unit 60 to control application of varnish to the paper P after image formation.
  • the varnish application control unit 216 controls driving of the components of the varnish application unit 60 so that the varnish is applied to the paper P with a certain thickness.
  • the varnish post-processing control unit 217 controls the varnish post-processing unit 70 to control the varnish post-processing applied to the paper P.
  • the varnish post-processing control unit 217 controls driving of the constituent elements of the varnish post-processing unit 70 so that processing corresponding to the type of varnish used for the varnish coating is performed.
  • the accumulation control unit 218 controls the accumulation unit 80 to control the accumulation of the paper P.
  • the stacking control unit 218 controls the driving of the components of the stacking unit 80 so that the sequentially discharged sheets P are stacked in a bundle.
  • the various integrated devices described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11 and FIGS. 16 to 20 can be components of the stacking unit 80.
  • the stacking unit 80 can be configured to include one or a combination of various stacking devices described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11 and FIGS. 16 to 20.
  • the accumulation control unit 218 can function as the blocking countermeasure control unit 112.
  • control device 100 functions as a communication control unit 220, an image processing unit 230, a drying condition setting unit 234, a varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238, an information acquisition unit 240, and a display control unit 242.
  • the communication control unit 220 controls communication with an external device (not shown).
  • the image processing unit 230 processes image data of an image acquired as a printing target, and image forming data that can be formed by the image forming unit 40 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1, that is, dot arrangement data of each ink color Convert to The image processing unit 230 performs various signal processing such as color conversion processing, density correction processing, and halftone processing. At the time of image formation, ink ejection operations of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K in the image forming unit 40 are controlled based on the dot arrangement data generated by the image processing unit 230.
  • the drying condition setting unit 234 sets ink drying conditions that define the drying strength when the ink drying unit 50 dries the ink.
  • the ink drying conditions are determined according to the type of ink used for image formation, the amount of ink, and the type of varnish used.
  • the ink drying control unit 215 controls the operation of the ink drying unit 50 based on the ink drying conditions set by the drying condition setting unit 234.
  • the ink drying unit 50 is feedback-controlled based on the temperature information of the paper P detected using the first temperature detection unit 56. That is, the temperature information of the paper P detected using the first temperature detection unit 56 is sent to the drying condition setting unit 234.
  • the drying condition setting unit 234 changes the ink drying condition based on the temperature information of the paper P acquired through the first temperature detection unit 56.
  • the setting of ink drying conditions includes initial setting of ink drying conditions and change of preset ink drying conditions.
  • the varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238 sets varnish post-processing conditions based on the type of varnish to be used and the type of ink.
  • the varnish post-processing control unit 217 controls the operation of the varnish post-processing unit 70 based on the varnish post-processing conditions set by the varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238.
  • the varnish post-processing unit 70 is feedback-controlled based on the temperature information of the paper P detected by the second temperature detection unit 94. That is, the temperature information of the paper P detected using the second temperature detection unit 94 is sent to the varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238.
  • the varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238 changes the varnish post-processing condition based on the temperature information of the paper P detected using the second temperature detection unit 94.
  • the setting of the varnish post-processing conditions includes an initial setting of the varnish post-processing conditions and a change of preset varnish post-processing conditions.
  • the information acquisition unit 240 is an interface that captures various types of information from outside the control device 100 or from a processing unit inside the control device 100.
  • the information acquisition unit 240 can acquire information input from the operation unit 202.
  • the stack allowable number determination unit 102 can acquire information such as the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, powder amount, number of printed sheets Y, and stack speed V of the paper used for printing via the information acquisition unit 240. it can.
  • the calculation table storage unit 104 may be a part of the storage area of the storage unit 204. Further, the calculation table storage unit 104 may be a part of the storage area of the RAM.
  • the display control unit 242 controls the display content of the display unit 203.
  • the display control unit 242 generates a display signal to be displayed on the display unit 203 and supplies the generated display signal to the display unit 203.
  • Information about the candidate for blocking suppression generated by the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 is displayed on the display unit 203 via the display control unit 242.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 may be an apparatus configuration that realizes at least one of the various measures illustrated as examples 1 to 4 of the blocking suppression measures.
  • the allowable stack number determination unit 102 the specified time determination unit 103, the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106, the blocking countermeasure control unit 112, and the stack speed of the control device 100.
  • the hardware structure of the processing unit (processing unit) that executes various processes is as follows. Various processors.
  • processors that can change their circuit configuration after manufacturing, such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) that is a general-purpose processor that functions as various processing units by executing programs. Examples include a dedicated electric circuit that is a processor having a circuit configuration specifically designed to execute a specific process such as a programmable logic device (PLD) and an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit).
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • One processing unit may be configured by one of these various processors, or may be configured by two or more processors of the same type or different types.
  • one processing unit may be configured by a plurality of FPGAs or a combination of a CPU and an FPGA.
  • the plurality of processing units may be configured by one processor.
  • configuring a plurality of processing units with one processor first, as represented by a computer such as a client or server, one processor is configured with a combination of one or more CPUs and software. There is a form in which the processor functions as a plurality of processing units.
  • SoC system-on-chip
  • a form of using a processor that implements the functions of the entire system including a plurality of processing units with a single IC (integrated circuit) chip. is there.
  • various processing units are configured using one or more of the various processors as a hardware structure.
  • the hardware structure of these various processors is more specifically an electric circuit (circuitry) in which circuit elements such as semiconductor elements are combined.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a printing processing procedure for performing varnish coating.
  • the flowchart shown in FIG. 23 is a print processing procedure started after the stack method determination processing described with reference to FIG.
  • step S21 paper supply process
  • step S22 processing liquid application process
  • step S23 treatment liquid drying step
  • step S24 image forming step
  • step S25 ink drying step
  • step S26 varnish coating process
  • step S27 varnish post-processing step
  • step S27 varnish post-processing step
  • step S29 stacking process
  • An ejector of an inkjet head includes a nozzle that discharges liquid, a pressure chamber that communicates with the nozzle, and a discharge energy generating element that applies discharge energy to the liquid in the pressure chamber.
  • the means for generating the ejection energy is not limited to the piezoelectric element, and various ejection energy generating elements such as a heating element and an electrostatic actuator can be applied.
  • Corresponding ejection energy generating elements are provided in the flow path structure according to the ejection method of the inkjet head.
  • the user can select an appropriate measure that can prevent the occurrence of blocking according to the designated number of prints.
  • an inkjet printing apparatus has been described as an example of a printing apparatus.
  • the present invention is not limited to an inkjet printing apparatus, and may be various types such as an offset printing apparatus, a gravure printing apparatus, a flexographic printing apparatus, a screen printing apparatus, or an electrophotographic apparatus.
  • the present invention can be applied to a printing apparatus using various printing methods.
  • FIG. 1 shows an inkjet printing apparatus that performs varnish coating in-line, but the present invention can also be applied to a printing system that performs online varnish coating.
  • Online varnishing is a form in which image forming processing using a printing device and varnishing processing using a varnishing device are continuously performed as a series of processing. Online varnishing is performed, for example, by a printing system that combines a printing device that does not have a varnishing function and a varnishing device.
  • a printing apparatus that does not have a varnish coating function is a printing apparatus that discharges paper without performing varnish coating after image formation.
  • the varnish coating apparatus may be a varnish coating apparatus configured separately from the printing apparatus.
  • a printing system in which a printing apparatus that does not have a varnishing function and a varnishing apparatus are connected in series can perform online varnishing.
  • the printing system may include a sheet transfer device such as a belt conveyor for automatically transferring the sheet after image formation discharged from the printing apparatus to the sheet feeding unit of the varnish coat apparatus.
  • Online varnishing is the same as inline varnishing in that the image forming process and the varnishing process are performed continuously, but the image forming process and the varnishing process are performed using separate devices. Is different. Due to this difference, the time interval until the varnish coat tends to be longer than that of the in-line varnish coat.
  • the online varnish is different from the offline varnish in that the paper discharged from the printing apparatus is fed to the varnish apparatus as it is, and the sheets after image formation are not collected before the varnish.
  • the paper discharge unit of the varnishing device corresponds to the stacking unit.
  • a printing system that performs online varnish coating can be an embodiment of the printing apparatus of the present invention.
  • the single-pass inkjet printing apparatus has been described.
  • the present invention can also be applied to a multi-scan inkjet printing apparatus that forms an image by reciprocating a short inkjet head. .
  • the varnish is applied to the paper by a so-called roll coater, but the configuration of the varnish application portion is not limited to this.
  • a varnish may be applied to the paper using a varnish coater such as a chamber coater.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 is configured such that the number of printed sheets Y is the stack allowable number. You may provide the automatic countermeasure mode which performs a blocking suppression measure automatically, when exceeding X.
  • the inkjet printing apparatus 1 preferably has a configuration including a user interface that allows a user to selectively set whether to enable or disable the automatic countermeasure mode.
  • the execution of the blocking suppression measure is controlled according to the selection instruction input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
  • the blocking suppression measure is automatically selected without waiting for the input of the selection instruction from the selection instruction receiving unit 110, and the automatically selected blocking suppression measure is executed. Will be.
  • Paper is an example of a medium used for image formation.
  • the term “paper” can be understood as a generic term for various terms such as recording paper, printing paper, printing medium, printing medium, printing medium, image forming medium, image forming medium, image receiving medium, and discharged medium.
  • the material, shape, etc. of the medium are not particularly limited, and various sheet bodies can be used regardless of seal paper, resin sheet, film, cloth, nonwoven fabric, and other materials and shapes.
  • the paper is not limited to a single sheet medium but may be a continuous medium such as continuous paper.
  • the sheet medium is separated one by one at the stage of being stacked on the stacking unit, and is fed from a continuous medium after being cut to a specified size, or an image
  • the sheet may be cut into a predetermined size and discharged after formation.
  • the term “printing apparatus” includes the concept of terms such as a printing press, a printer, a printing apparatus, an image recording apparatus, an image forming apparatus, an image output apparatus, or a drawing apparatus.
  • the term “printing apparatus” includes the concept of a printing system in which a plurality of apparatuses are combined.
  • Image is to be interpreted in a broad sense and includes color images, black and white images, single color images, gradation images, uniform density (solid) images, and the like.
  • the “image” is not limited to a photographic image, but is used as a comprehensive term including a pattern, a character, a symbol, a line drawing, a mosaic pattern, a color painting pattern, other various patterns, or an appropriate combination thereof.
  • printing includes the concept of terms such as image formation, image recording, printing, drawing, and printing. Further, the term “printing” may be used as a conceptual term including post-processing such as varnishing performed after image formation.
  • the term “orthogonal” or “perpendicular” refers to a case of intersecting at an angle of substantially 90 ° in an aspect of intersecting at an angle of less than 90 ° or greater than 90 °. The mode which produces the same operation effect as is included.
  • the term “parallel” includes aspects that can be regarded as being substantially parallel among the aspects that are strictly non-parallel, and that can provide substantially the same operational effects as when parallel.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Ink Jet (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a printing device, printing control method, and device making it possible to curb the occurrence of blocking in an accumulating unit in a case where printed articles are being stacked in the accumulation unit after having been coated with water-based varnish. The printing device is provided with: a varnish coating unit 60 for coating, with a water-based varnish, a medium on which an image has been formed with the use of an image formation unit 40; and an accumulating unit 80 for stacking the medium that has been coated with the water-based varnish. The printing device is also provided with: an allowable stacking count determination unit 102 for determining an allowable stacking count at which stacking can be carried out at a specific stacking speed without the occurrence of blocking, such determination made on the basis of a combination of two or more conditions from medium type, varnish type, ink quantity, and powder quantity; and an information presentation unit 108 for presenting at least one blocking countermeasure that enables a designated number of prints to be printed and the occurrence of blocking to be curbed, if the designated number of prints exceeds the allowable stacking count.

Description

印刷装置、印刷制御方法及び装置Printing apparatus, printing control method and apparatus
 本発明は、印刷装置、印刷制御方法及び装置に係り、特に、ニスコートされた印刷物をスタックする場合のブロッキング抑制技術に関する。 The present invention relates to a printing apparatus, a printing control method, and an apparatus, and more particularly, to a blocking suppression technique when stacking varnished printed materials.
 印刷物の表面加工の1つとしてニスコートが知られている。ニスコートは、ニスを用いて印刷物の画像表面をコーティングする技術である。ニスコートは、例えば、画像表面に光沢を与えて印刷物に高級感を与えたり、画像表面の耐擦性及び/又は耐薬品性を向上させたりすることを目的として行われる。 A varnish coat is known as one of the surface treatments for printed materials. Varnishing is a technique for coating the image surface of a printed material using a varnish. The varnish coat is performed for the purpose of, for example, giving gloss to the image surface to give a high quality feeling to the printed matter, or improving the abrasion resistance and / or chemical resistance of the image surface.
 特許文献1には、画像形成後の用紙の画像表面にニスを塗布する機能を備えたインクジェット印刷装置が記載されている。 Patent Document 1 describes an ink jet printing apparatus having a function of applying a varnish to an image surface of paper after image formation.
特開2016-107419号公報JP 2016-107419 A
 インクを用いて用紙に画像を形成し、その後に画像表面に水性ニスを塗布する場合、水性ニス塗布後の印刷物をスタックする集積部においてブロッキングが発生するという問題がある。ブロッキングは、「スタッカーブロッキング」と同義である。ブロッキングの問題は、インクジェット方式によって画像を形成する印刷装置に限らず、版を用いて画像を形成する有版式の印刷装置など様々な画像形成方式の印刷装置について共通する課題である。水性インクを用いるインクジェット印刷装置は、用紙に付与される水分量が比較的多くなるため、上記の課題が特に顕著である。 In the case where an image is formed on paper using ink and then an aqueous varnish is applied to the surface of the image, there is a problem that blocking occurs in the stacking portion where the printed matter after the aqueous varnish application is stacked. Blocking is synonymous with “stacker blocking”. The problem of blocking is a problem common not only to printing apparatuses that form images by the inkjet method, but also to printing apparatuses of various image forming methods such as plate-type printing apparatuses that form images using plates. In the ink jet printing apparatus using the water-based ink, the amount of moisture applied to the paper is relatively large, and thus the above problem is particularly remarkable.
 特許文献1に示されているとおり、ニスコートの方式には、インライン方式、オフライン方式、及びオンライン方式がある。これらいずれの方式もブロッキングは発生し得るが、特にインライン方式の場合に上記の課題は顕著である。 As shown in Patent Document 1, there are an inline method, an offline method, and an online method as varnish methods. In any of these methods, blocking can occur, but the above problem is particularly remarkable in the case of the inline method.
 本発明はこのような事情に鑑みてなされたもので、水性ニスを塗布した後の印刷物をスタックする場合の集積部におけるブロッキングの発生を抑制し得る印刷装置、印刷制御方法及び装置を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and provides a printing apparatus, a printing control method, and an apparatus capable of suppressing the occurrence of blocking in a stacking portion when stacking printed matter after applying a water-based varnish. With the goal.
 上記の目的を達成するために、本開示は、次の発明態様を提供する。 In order to achieve the above object, the present disclosure provides the following aspects of the invention.
 第1態様に係る印刷装置は、媒体に画像を形成する画像形成部と、画像形成部を用いて画像が形成された媒体に水性ニスを塗布するニス塗布部と、水性ニスが塗布された媒体にブロッキング抑止効果を持つパウダーを所定の条件で付与し、特定のスタック速度でスタックする集積部と、媒体の媒体種、水性ニスのニス種、画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び、集積部で付与されるパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、特定のスタック速度でブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能なスタック許容枚数を決定するスタック許容枚数決定部と、印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数がスタック許容枚数を超える場合に、指定された印刷枚数の印刷を実現でき、かつ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示する情報提示部と、を備える印刷装置である。 A printing apparatus according to a first aspect includes an image forming unit that forms an image on a medium, a varnish applying unit that applies an aqueous varnish to a medium on which an image is formed using the image forming unit, and a medium on which an aqueous varnish is applied Is applied under predetermined conditions to a powder having a blocking inhibitory effect, and is stacked at a specific stacking speed, medium type of medium, varnish type of aqueous varnish, ink amount used for image formation, and accumulation A stack allowable number determining unit that determines a stack allowable number of sheets that can be stacked without occurrence of blocking at a specific stack speed from a combination of two or more conditions among the amount of powder applied by the unit, and printing When the number of prints specified as the number exceeds the allowable number of stacks, printing of the specified number of prints can be realized, and the occurrence of blocking is reduced. Also printing apparatus comprising an information presenting section for presenting the one blocking control measures.
 第1態様の印刷装置は、印刷に用いる媒体の媒体種、水性ニスのニス種、インク量、及びパウダー量のうちの2つ以上の条件の組み合わせからスタック許容枚数を決定する。第1態様の印刷装置は、指定された印刷枚数とスタック許容枚数とを比較することにより、指定の印刷枚数を印刷する場合の集積部におけるブロッキングの発生の有無を予測できる。印刷枚数がスタック許容枚数を超える場合は、ブロッキングが発生すると予測される。第1態様の印刷装置は、印刷枚数がスタック許容枚数を超える場合に、指定の印刷枚数の印刷を実現でき、かつ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制するブロッキング抑制策を少なくとも1つ提示する。 The printing apparatus of the first aspect determines the allowable number of stacks from a combination of two or more conditions of the medium type of the medium used for printing, the varnish type of the aqueous varnish, the ink amount, and the powder amount. The printing apparatus according to the first aspect can predict whether or not blocking has occurred in the stacking unit when the designated number of printed sheets is printed by comparing the designated number of printed sheets with the stack allowable number. If the number of printed sheets exceeds the stack allowable number, blocking is predicted to occur. The printing apparatus according to the first aspect presents at least one blocking suppression measure that can realize printing of a specified number of printed sheets and suppress the occurrence of blocking when the number of printed sheets exceeds the stack allowable number.
 第1態様によれば、ユーザは、集積部においてブロッキングが発生するか否かを事前に把握することができる。提示されたブロッキング抑制策が実施されることにより、指定の印刷枚数を印刷する場合の集積部におけるブロッキングの発生を防止することが可能になる。 According to the first aspect, the user can grasp in advance whether blocking occurs in the stacking unit. By implementing the presented blocking suppression measure, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of blocking in the stacking unit when printing a specified number of printed sheets.
 なお、画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量は、印刷対象の画像内容と相関がある。インク量は、例えば、印刷対象である画像データの信号値から計算によって求めることができる。つまり、インク量は、画像データを基に評価し得る。 Note that the amount of ink used to form an image has a correlation with the content of the image to be printed. The ink amount can be obtained by calculation from a signal value of image data to be printed, for example. That is, the ink amount can be evaluated based on the image data.
 第2態様として、第1態様の印刷装置において、情報提示部に提示される少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策の採否を選択する指示の入力を受け付ける選択指示受付部と、選択指示受付部から入力された選択の指示に従い、ブロッキング抑制策の実行を制御する制御部と、を備える構成とすることができる。 As a second aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the first aspect, a selection instruction receiving unit that receives an input of an instruction for selecting whether or not to adopt at least one blocking suppression measure presented to the information presentation unit, and a selection instruction receiving unit are input. And a control unit that controls execution of the blocking suppression measure in accordance with the selection instruction.
 「選択の指示」には、提示された1つ以上のブロッキング抑制策の候補の中から、採用するブロッキング抑制策を選択する指示、又は、ブロッキング抑制策を採用しない旨の選択の指示の少なくともいずれか1つの指示が含まれる。 The “selection instruction” includes at least one of an instruction to select a blocking suppression measure to be adopted from one or more candidate blocking suppression measures presented, and an instruction to select not to adopt a blocking suppression measure. One instruction is included.
 「ブロッキング抑制策の実行を制御する」ことには、ブロッキング抑制策を実行するか否かの制御も含まれる。つまり、提示された1つ以上のブロッキング抑制策のいずれをも実行しないようにすることも「ブロッキング抑制策の実行を制御する」ことの概念に含まれる。 “Controlling execution of blocking suppression measures” includes control of whether or not to execute blocking suppression measures. That is, it is included in the concept of “controlling execution of the blocking suppression measure” not to execute any one or more of the presented blocking suppression measures.
 第2態様によれば、ユーザは情報提示部に提示されたブロッキング抑制策の採否を判断して、選択指示受付部から採否の選択指示を入力することができる。 According to the second aspect, the user can determine whether or not to adopt the blocking suppression measure presented in the information presentation unit, and can input a selection instruction for adoption from the selection instruction receiving unit.
 第3態様として、第1態様又は第2態様の印刷装置において、印刷枚数がスタック許容枚数以下である場合に、特定のスタック速度にて集積部にスタック許容枚数以下の枚数の媒体をスタックして単一のスタック束を形成するスタック動作が実行される構成とすることができる。 As a third aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the first aspect or the second aspect, when the number of printed sheets is equal to or less than the allowable number of stacks, a stack of media equal to or smaller than the allowable number of stacks is stacked on the stacking unit at a specific stack speed. A stack operation that forms a single stack bundle may be executed.
 印刷枚数がスタック許容枚数以下である場合は、指定の印刷枚数を特定のスタック速度にて集積部にスタックしてもブロッキングが発生しないと予測される。したがって、この場合は、別途のブロッキング抑制策を実施する必要がない。 If the number of printed sheets is less than or equal to the allowable number of stacks, blocking is not expected even if the specified number of printed sheets is stacked on the stacking unit at a specific stack speed. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to implement a separate blocking suppression measure.
 第4態様として、第1態様から第3態様のいずれか一態様の印刷装置において、特定のスタック速度にて集積部に媒体をスタックして単一のスタック束を形成するスタック方法を第一のスタック方法という場合に、ブロッキング抑制策は、第一のスタック方法と異なるスタック動作となる第二のスタック方法を実施する方策である構成とすることができる。 As a fourth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to any one of the first aspect to the third aspect, a stacking method in which a single stack bundle is formed by stacking media on the stacking unit at a specific stacking speed. In the case of the stack method, the blocking suppression measure can be configured as a measure for implementing the second stack method in which the stack operation is different from the first stack method.
 第5態様として、第1態様から第4態様のいずれか一態様の印刷装置において、媒体種、ニス種、インク量、及び、パウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の複数の組み合わせの各々に対するスタック許容枚数の値を規定した第一の算出テーブルを記憶しておく算出テーブル記憶部を備え、スタック許容枚数決定部は、第一の算出テーブルを用いてスタック許容枚数を決定する構成とすることができる。 As a fifth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, each of a plurality of combinations of two or more conditions among a medium type, a varnish type, an ink amount, and a powder amount. A calculation table storage unit that stores a first calculation table that defines the value of the allowable stack number is provided, and the allowable stack number determining unit is configured to determine the allowable stack number using the first calculation table. Can do.
 スタック許容枚数決定部は、与えられた印刷条件から第一の算出テーブルを用いて、条件に適したスタック許容枚数を決定し得る。印刷条件には、媒体種、ニス種、インク量、及び、パウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件が含まれる。 The stack allowable number determination unit can determine the stack allowable number suitable for the conditions using the first calculation table from the given printing conditions. The printing conditions include two or more conditions of medium type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount.
 第6態様として、第1態様から第5態様のいずれか一態様の印刷装置において、ブロッキング抑制策の1つは、特定のスタック速度にて集積部にスタックを行い、スタック枚数がスタック許容枚数に到達したら、別のスタック束を新たに積む方策である構成とすることができる。 As a sixth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to any one of the first aspect to the fifth aspect, one of the blocking suppression measures is to stack the stacking unit at a specific stack speed, and the stack number becomes the stack allowable number. When it reaches, it can be set as the structure which is a policy of newly stacking another stack bundle.
 第7態様として、第6態様の印刷装置において、集積部は、スタック許容枚数ごとに、スタック束を分離する仕切り部材が配置される集積装置を備え、仕切り部材の上に新たなスタック束が積まれる構成とすることができる。 As a seventh aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the sixth aspect, the stacking unit includes a stacking device in which a partition member for separating the stack bundle is disposed for each stack allowable number, and a new stack bundle is stacked on the partition member. Can be configured.
 第8態様として、第6態様の印刷装置において、集積部は、スタック枚数がスタック許容枚数に到達したスタック束を、スタック位置から別の退避位置に移動させるスタック束退避機構を備える構成とすることができる。 As an eighth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the sixth aspect, the stacking unit includes a stack bundle retracting mechanism that moves the stack bundle that has reached the stack allowable number from the stack position to another retract position. Can do.
 第9態様として、第8態様の印刷装置において、スタック束退避機構は、ベルトコンベアを含み、ベルトコンベアは、複数のスタック束のそれぞれをベルトコンベア上の異なる位置に載置し得るベルト長を有する構成とすることができる。 As a ninth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the eighth aspect, the stack bundle retracting mechanism includes a belt conveyor, and the belt conveyor has a belt length capable of placing each of the plurality of stack bundles at different positions on the belt conveyor. It can be configured.
 第10態様として、第8態様の印刷装置において、スタック束退避機構は、複数のスタック束を載置し得る複数のスタックエリアを有する回転台を含み、回転台を回転させて、スタック束が積まれたスタックエリアの位置を移動させる構成とすることができる。 As a tenth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the eighth aspect, the stack bundle retracting mechanism includes a turntable having a plurality of stack areas on which a plurality of stack bundles can be placed, and the turntable is rotated to stack the stack bundles. The position of the stacked stack area can be moved.
 第11態様として、第6態様及び第8態様から第10態様のいずれか一態様の印刷装置において、印刷枚数に対して、スタック許容枚数ごとに、新たなスタック束を積むと、スタック束の総数が3以上になる場合に、スタック許容枚数に到達した第一番目のスタック束とは別に、新たに積まれた第二番目のスタック束のスタック枚数がスタック許容枚数に到達した後、第一番目のスタック束のスタック終了から規定時間が経過した第一番目のスタック束の上に、第三番目以降のいずれかのスタック束を積む構成とすることができる。 As an eleventh aspect, in the printing apparatus according to any one of the sixth aspect and the eighth aspect to the tenth aspect, when a new stack bundle is stacked for each stack allowable number with respect to the number of printed sheets, the total number of stack bundles When the number of stacks is 3 or more, the first stack bundle that has reached the allowable stack quantity is separated from the first stack bundle after the stack quantity of the newly stacked second stack bundle has reached the allowable stack quantity. Any one of the third and subsequent stack bundles may be stacked on the first stack bundle whose specified time has elapsed since the stack end of the stack bundle.
 第12態様として、第1態様から第5態様のいずれか一態様の印刷装置において、ブロッキング抑制策の1つが、特定のスタック速度にてスタック束を積み、スタック枚数がスタック許容枚数に到達したら、一旦印刷を停止し、規定時間経過した後に、印刷を再開してスタック束にスタックを継続する方策である構成とすることができる。 As a twelfth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to any one of the first to fifth aspects, when one of the blocking suppression measures stacks a stack bundle at a specific stack speed and the stack number reaches the stack allowable number, It is possible to adopt a configuration in which printing is temporarily stopped and printing is resumed after a specified time has elapsed and the stack is continued in the stack bundle.
 第13態様として、第11態様又は第12態様の印刷装置において、媒体の媒体種、水性ニスのニス種、画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び、パウダーのパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、スタック許容枚数に到達したスタック束の上に特定のスタック速度でブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能な規定時間を決定する規定時間決定部を備える構成とすることができる。 As a thirteenth aspect, in the printing apparatus of the eleventh aspect or the twelfth aspect, two or more of the medium type of the medium, the varnish type of the aqueous varnish, the ink amount of the ink used for forming the image, and the powder amount of the powder From the combination of the above conditions, a specified time determining unit that determines a specified time that can be stacked without occurrence of blocking at a specific stack speed on a stack bundle that has reached the allowable stack number can be provided. .
 第14態様として、第13態様の印刷装置において、媒体種、ニス種、インク量、及び、パウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の複数の組み合わせに対するスタック許容枚数の値及び規定時間の値を規定した第二の算出テーブルを記憶しておく算出テーブル記憶部を備え、規定時間決定部は、指定された条件から第二の算出テーブルを用いて、条件に適した規定時間を決定する構成とすることができる。 As a fourteenth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the thirteenth aspect, a stack allowable number value and a specified time value for a plurality of combinations of two or more conditions among medium type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount are set. A calculation table storage unit for storing a specified second calculation table, and the specified time determination unit determines a specified time suitable for the condition from the specified condition using the second calculation table; can do.
 第二の算出テーブルは、第一の算出テーブルとしての役割を果たし得る。スタック許容枚数決定部は、与えられた印刷条件から第二の算出テーブルを用いて、条件に適したスタック許容枚数を決定することができる。規定時間決定部は、与えられた印刷条件から第二の算出テーブルを用いて、条件に適した規定時間を決定することができる。 The second calculation table can serve as the first calculation table. The allowable stack number determining unit can determine the allowable stack number suitable for the conditions using the second calculation table from the given printing conditions. The specified time determination unit can determine a specified time suitable for the conditions using the second calculation table from the given printing conditions.
 第15態様として、第1態様から第5態様のいずれか一態様の印刷装置において、ブロッキング抑制策の1つが、スタック速度を特定のスタック速度よりも遅くする方策である構成とすることができる。 As a fifteenth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to any one of the first to fifth aspects, one of the blocking suppression measures can be configured to make the stack speed slower than a specific stack speed.
 第16態様として、第15態様の印刷装置において、ブロッキングの発生が無く印刷枚数以上のスタックが可能となるスタック速度を決定するスタック速度決定部と、スタック速度決定部によって決定されたスタック速度に従い、スタック速度を制御するスタック速度制御部と、を備える構成とすることができる。 As a sixteenth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the fifteenth aspect, according to a stack speed determining unit that determines a stack speed at which stacking can be performed more than the number of printed sheets without occurrence of blocking, and a stack speed determined by the stack speed determining unit, And a stack speed control unit that controls the stack speed.
 第17態様として、第16態様の印刷装置において、スタック速度決定部は、印刷枚数と、スタック許容枚数と、特定のスタック速度とを用いて、印刷枚数以上のスタックが可能なスタック速度を算出する構成とすることができる。 As a seventeenth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the sixteenth aspect, the stack speed determining unit calculates a stack speed that allows stacking of the number of print sheets or more using the number of printed sheets, the stack allowable number, and a specific stack speed. It can be configured.
 第18態様として、第16態様又は第17態様の印刷装置において、スタック速度制御部は、媒体の搬送速度を制御する構成とすることができる。 As an eighteenth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the sixteenth aspect or the seventeenth aspect, the stack speed control unit may be configured to control the medium conveyance speed.
 第19態様として、第16態様又は第17態様の印刷装置において、スタック速度制御部は、媒体を画像形成部に供給する媒体供給時間間隔を制御する構成とすることができる。 As a nineteenth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the sixteenth aspect or the seventeenth aspect, the stack speed control unit can control the medium supply time interval for supplying the medium to the image forming unit.
 第20態様として、第1態様から第5態様のいずれか一態様の印刷装置において、ブロッキング抑制策の1つが、スタック許容枚数よりも少ない枚数の小部数に分割された媒体の束を一定時間保持した後に、媒体をスタックすることにより、スタック許容枚数を超えるスタック枚数のスタック束を形成する方策である構成とすることができる。 As a twentieth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to any one of the first aspect to the fifth aspect, one of the blocking suppression measures is to hold a bundle of media divided into a smaller number of smaller copies than the allowable number of stacks for a certain period of time. After that, by stacking the media, it is possible to adopt a configuration that is a measure for forming a stack bundle having a stack number exceeding the allowable number of stacks.
 第21態様として、第20態様の印刷装置において、集積部は、小部数の媒体の束を格納する複数の格納棚を有し、複数の格納棚を順次移動させて、格納棚に小部数の媒体の束を格納し、格納棚に小部数の媒体の束を一定時間保持する集積装置を備える構成とすることができる。 As a twenty-first aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the twentieth aspect, the stacking unit has a plurality of storage shelves for storing a small number of medium bundles, and sequentially moves the plurality of storage shelves so that a small number of copies are stored in the storage shelf. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which a stack of media is stored and a stacking device that holds a bundle of a small number of media in a storage shelf for a certain period of time.
 第22態様として、第20態様の印刷装置において、集積部は、媒体の側面の方向から、媒体の束を拘束する位置にエアーを噴射して、噴射したエアーによって小部数の媒体の束を拘束することにより、小部数の媒体の束を一定時間保持する集積装置を備える構成とすることができる。 As a twenty-second aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the twentieth aspect, the stacking unit injects air from a side surface direction of the medium to a position where the medium bundle is constrained, and constrains a small number of medium bundles by the ejected air. By doing so, it is possible to provide a stacking device that holds a bundle of a small number of media for a certain period of time.
 第23態様として、第20態様の印刷装置において、集積部は、小部数の媒体の束を保持する可動式の保持部材を備えた集積装置を有し、保持部材は、小部数の媒体の束を保持する保持位置と、小部数の媒体の束を非保持とする非保持位置とに移動可能であり、保持部材によって小部数の媒体の束を保持した後、保持部材を非保持位置に移動させて保持状態を解除することにより、媒体をスタックする構成とすることができる。 As a twenty-third aspect, in the printing apparatus according to the twentieth aspect, the stacking unit includes a stacking device including a movable holding member that holds a small number of medium bundles, and the holding member is a small number of medium bundles. Can be moved to a non-holding position where a small number of medium bundles are not held, and after the small number of medium bundles are held by the holding member, the holding member is moved to the non-holding position. By releasing the holding state, the medium can be stacked.
 第24態様として、第1態様から第23態様のいずれか一態様の印刷装置において、画像形成部は、インクジェットヘッドを含む構成とすることができる。 As a twenty-fourth aspect, in the printing apparatus according to any one of the first to twenty-third aspects, the image forming unit may include an inkjet head.
 なお、第1態様から第24態様の各態様は、適宜組み合わせてもよい。例えば、第6態様、第12態様、第15態様、及び第19態様として示したブロッキング抑制策のうち2つ以上のブロッキング抑制策を実行可能な印刷装置を構成することができる。 In addition, you may combine suitably each aspect of a 1st aspect to a 24th aspect. For example, it is possible to configure a printing apparatus that can execute two or more blocking suppression measures among the blocking suppression measures shown as the sixth aspect, the twelfth aspect, the fifteenth aspect, and the nineteenth aspect.
 第25態様に係る印刷制御方法は、画像が形成された媒体に水性ニスを塗布し、水性ニスが塗布された媒体にブロッキング抑止効果を持つパウダーを所定の条件で付与し、特定のスタック速度で集積部にスタックする印刷装置の動作を制御する印刷制御方法であって、画像が形成される媒体の媒体種、画像が形成された媒体に塗布される水性ニスのニス種、画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び、集積部で付与されるパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、特定のスタック速度でブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能なスタック許容枚数を決定するスタック許容枚数決定工程と、印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数がスタック許容枚数を超える場合に、指定された印刷枚数の印刷を実現でき、かつ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示する情報提示工程と、を含む。 In the printing control method according to the twenty-fifth aspect, an aqueous varnish is applied to a medium on which an image is formed, and a powder having a blocking inhibiting effect is applied to the medium on which the aqueous varnish is applied under predetermined conditions, and at a specific stack speed. A printing control method for controlling the operation of a printing apparatus stacked in a stacking unit, which is used for forming a medium type of an image-forming medium, an aqueous varnish type applied to an image-forming medium, and forming an image. A stack that determines the allowable number of stacks that can be stacked without causing blocking at a specific stack speed from a combination of two or more conditions among the ink amount of ink and the amount of powder applied in the stacking unit. When the number of prints designated as the number of sheets to be printed and the number of prints designated as the number of sheets to be printed exceed the allowable number of stacks, printing of the designated number of prints can be realized, and Including the information presentation step of presenting at least one blocking control measures for suppressing the occurrence of locking.
 第25態様に係る印刷制御方法において、第2態様から第24態様にて特定した印刷装置の特定事項と同様の事項を適宜組み合わせることができる。その場合、印刷装置において特定される処理や動作の機能を担う手段としての処理部や機能部は、これに対応する処理や動作の「工程(ステップ)」の要素として把握することができる。 In the printing control method according to the twenty-fifth aspect, the same matters as the specific matters of the printing apparatus specified in the second to twenty-fourth aspects can be appropriately combined. In this case, the processing unit or function unit serving as a unit responsible for the processing or operation function specified in the printing apparatus can be grasped as an element of a “process (step)” of the corresponding processing or operation.
 第26態様に係る印刷制御装置は、画像が形成される媒体の媒体種、画像が形成された媒体に塗布される水性ニスのニス種、画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び、水性ニスが塗布された媒体に所定の条件で集積部にて付与されるブロッキング抑止効果を持つパウダーのパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、特定のスタック速度でブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能なスタック許容枚数を決定するスタック許容枚数決定部と、印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数がスタック許容枚数を超える場合に、指定された印刷枚数の印刷を実現でき、かつ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示する情報提示部と、を備える。 A printing control apparatus according to a twenty-sixth aspect includes a medium type of a medium on which an image is formed, a varnish type of an aqueous varnish applied to the medium on which an image is formed, an ink amount of ink used for forming an image, and an aqueous varnish. From the combination of two or more conditions of the amount of powder having a blocking deterrent effect that is applied to the medium on which the coating is applied in a predetermined condition, the powder is stacked at a specific stack speed without blocking. A stack allowable number determination unit that determines an allowable stack number, and when the number of prints specified as the number of sheets to be printed exceeds the stack allowable number, printing of the specified number of prints can be realized, and blocking is also possible. An information presentation unit that presents at least one blocking suppression measure that suppresses occurrence.
 第26態様の印刷制御装置は、画像の形成と水性ニスの塗布とを行う印刷装置の制御装置として用いることができる。第26態様に係る印刷制御装置において、第2態様から第24態様にて特定した印刷装置の特定事項と同様の事項を適宜組み合わせることができる。 The printing control apparatus according to the twenty-sixth aspect can be used as a control apparatus for a printing apparatus that performs image formation and aqueous varnish application. In the printing control apparatus according to the twenty-sixth aspect, matters similar to the identification items of the printing apparatus identified in the second aspect to the twenty-fourth aspect can be appropriately combined.
 本発明によれば、ユーザは、集積部においてブロッキングが発生するか否かを印刷実施前に事前に把握することができる。提示されたブロッキング抑制策が実施されることにより、指定の印刷枚数を印刷する場合の集積部におけるブロッキングの発生を防止することが可能である。 According to the present invention, the user can grasp in advance before printing whether or not blocking occurs in the stacking unit. By implementing the presented blocking suppression measures, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of blocking in the stacking unit when printing a specified number of printed sheets.
図1は、インクジェット印刷装置の一例を示す全体構成図である。FIG. 1 is an overall configuration diagram illustrating an example of an inkjet printing apparatus. 図2は、水性ニスが塗布された印刷物を積み重ねる場合におけるスタック中のニス表面と用紙との接着力の時間依存性を例示するグラフである。FIG. 2 is a graph illustrating the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case of stacking the printed materials coated with the aqueous varnish. 図3は、水性ニスが塗布された印刷物を積み重ねる場合におけるスタック中のニス表面と用紙との接着力の時間依存性を示す他の例のグラフである。FIG. 3 is a graph of another example showing the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case where the printed materials coated with the aqueous varnish are stacked. 図4は、水性ニスが塗布された印刷物を積み重ねる場合におけるスタック中のニス表面と用紙との接着力の時間依存性を示す他の例のグラフである。FIG. 4 is a graph of another example showing the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case where the printed matter coated with the aqueous varnish is stacked. 図5は、スタック許容枚数Xの算出に用いる算出テーブルの一例を示す図表である。FIG. 5 is a chart showing an example of a calculation table used for calculating the allowable stack number X. 図6は、インクジェット印刷装置の制御装置が実現する機能の一部を示したブロック図である。FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a part of functions realized by the control device of the inkjet printing apparatus. 図7は、制御装置における処理の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the control device. 図8は、ブロッキング抑制策の例1の概要を模式的に示す概念図である。FIG. 8 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing an outline of the first example of the blocking suppression measure. 図9は、ブロッキング抑制策の例1を実現する実施方法の具体例を概略的に示す図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically illustrating a specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 1 of the blocking suppression measure. 図10は、ブロッキング抑制策の例1を実現する実施方法の他の具体例を概略的に示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the first example of the blocking suppression measure. 図11は、ブロッキング抑制策の例1を実現する実施方法の他の具体例を概略的に示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the first example of the blocking suppression measure. 図12は、ブロッキング抑制策の例2の概要を模式的に示す概念図である。FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing an outline of the example 2 of the blocking suppression measure. 図13は、規定時間Tの算出に用いる算出テーブルの一例を示す図表である。FIG. 13 is a chart showing an example of a calculation table used for calculating the specified time T. 図14は、ブロッキング抑制策の例2を実施するインクジェット印刷装置が備える機能を示したブロック図である。FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating functions of an inkjet printing apparatus that implements Example 2 of the blocking suppression measure. 図15は、ブロッキング抑制策の例3を実施するインクジェット印刷装置が備える機能を示したブロック図である。FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating functions of an inkjet printing apparatus that implements Example 3 of the blocking suppression measure. 図16は、ブロッキング抑制策の例4を実現する実施方法の具体例を概略的に示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically illustrating a specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 4 of the blocking suppression measure. 図17は、図16に示した集積装置における格納棚に格納した印刷物の束を排紙台にスタックする様子を示した図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a bundle of printed materials stored in the storage shelf in the stacking apparatus illustrated in FIG. 図18は、図16及び図17に示した集積装置の動作を模式的に示した説明図である。FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the operation of the integrated device shown in FIGS. 16 and 17. 図19は、ブロッキング抑制策の例4を実現する実施方法の他の具体例を概略的に示す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the blocking suppression measure example 4. FIG. 図20は、ブロッキング抑制策の例4を実現する実施方法の他の具体例を概略的に示す図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the blocking suppression measure example 4. FIG. 図21は、インクジェット印刷装置の制御系の概略構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a control system of the inkjet printing apparatus. 図22は、制御装置が実現する機能のブロック図である。FIG. 22 is a block diagram of functions realized by the control device. 図23は、ニスコートを実施する印刷の処理手順を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a printing processing procedure for performing varnish coating.
 以下、添付図面に従って本発明の実施の形態について詳説する。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
 《インクジェット印刷装置の構成例》
 図1は、インクジェット印刷装置の一例を示す全体構成図である。インクジェット印刷装置1は、インラインでニスコートが可能な印刷装置として構成される。インクジェット印刷装置1は、給紙部10と、処理液塗布部20と、処理液乾燥部30と、画像形成部40と、インク乾燥部50と、ニス塗布部60と、ニス後処理部70と、集積部80と、を備える。
<< Configuration example of inkjet printing apparatus >>
FIG. 1 is an overall configuration diagram illustrating an example of an inkjet printing apparatus. The inkjet printing apparatus 1 is configured as a printing apparatus capable of varnish coating inline. The ink jet printing apparatus 1 includes a paper feeding unit 10, a treatment liquid application unit 20, a treatment liquid drying unit 30, an image forming unit 40, an ink drying unit 50, a varnish application unit 60, and a varnish post-processing unit 70. And an accumulating unit 80.
 〈給紙部〉
 給紙部10は、枚葉紙である用紙Pを1枚ずつ給紙する。給紙部10は、給紙装置11と、フィーダーボード12と、給紙ドラム13と、を備える。用紙Pは、給紙装置11の給紙台の上に、用紙束の状態で載置される。用紙Pの種類は、特に限定されないが、例えば、上質紙、コート紙、アート紙などの汎用の印刷用紙を用いることができる。汎用の印刷用紙とは、いわゆるインクジェット専用紙ではなく、オフセット印刷などの接触式の印刷においても一般的に使用される塗工紙、若しくは非塗工紙をいい、セルロースを主体とした用紙を指す。用紙Pは、画像を形成する媒体の一例である。
<Paper Feeder>
The paper feeding unit 10 feeds paper P, which is a sheet of paper, one by one. The paper feeding unit 10 includes a paper feeding device 11, a feeder board 12, and a paper feeding drum 13. The paper P is placed on the paper feed tray of the paper feeder 11 in a paper bundle state. The type of the paper P is not particularly limited, and for example, general-purpose printing paper such as high-quality paper, coated paper, and art paper can be used. General-purpose printing paper is not so-called inkjet paper but coated paper or non-coated paper generally used in contact printing such as offset printing, and refers to paper mainly composed of cellulose. . The paper P is an example of a medium on which an image is formed.
 給紙装置11は、給紙台の上に積まれた用紙Pを用紙束の上から順に1枚ずつ、一定の給紙時間間隔で引き上げてフィーダーボード12へと給紙する。フィーダーボード12は、給紙装置11から受け取った用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送して、給紙ドラム13に受け渡す。 The paper feeding device 11 feeds the paper P stacked on the paper feeding tray one by one from the top of the paper bundle one by one at a constant paper feeding time interval to the feeder board 12. The feeder board 12 conveys the sheet P received from the sheet feeding device 11 along a certain conveyance path and delivers it to the sheet feeding drum 13.
 給紙ドラム13は、フィーダーボード12から受け取った用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送して、処理液塗布ドラム21に受け渡す。給紙ドラム13は、そのドラム周面に図示せぬグリッパーを備えている。給紙ドラム13は、図示せぬグリッパーによって用紙Pの先端を把持して回転することにより、用紙Pをドラム周面に巻き掛けて搬送する。 The paper supply drum 13 conveys the paper P received from the feeder board 12 along a certain conveyance path, and delivers it to the treatment liquid coating drum 21. The paper feed drum 13 includes a gripper (not shown) on the drum peripheral surface. The paper feed drum 13 conveys the paper P around the drum circumferential surface by gripping and rotating the leading edge of the paper P with a gripper (not shown).
 〈処理液塗布部〉
 処理液塗布部20は、用紙Pに処理液を塗布する。本例の処理液は、画像形成部40において使用されるインク中の色材成分を凝集させる凝集剤を含む液体である。凝集剤としては、インク組成物のペーハー(pH)を変化させることができる化合物であってもよいし、多価金属塩であっても、ポリアリルアミン類であってもよい。pHを低下させ得る化合物としては、水溶性の高い酸性物質が好適に挙げられる。酸性物質は、1種単独で用いてもよく、また、2種以上を併用してもよい。
<Processing liquid application part>
The processing liquid application unit 20 applies the processing liquid to the paper P. The processing liquid of this example is a liquid containing an aggregating agent that aggregates the color material components in the ink used in the image forming unit 40. The flocculant may be a compound that can change the pH (pH) of the ink composition, a polyvalent metal salt, or a polyallylamine. Preferred examples of the compound capable of lowering the pH include acidic substances having high water solubility. An acidic substance may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
 このような処理液を用紙Pに塗布して印刷を行うことにより、汎用の印刷用紙を使用した場合であっても、インクの広がり、及び/又は移動が抑制され、高品質な画像の形成が可能になる。処理液は、前処理液、プレコート液、又はプレコンディショニング液などの用語で呼ばれる場合がある。 By applying such a treatment liquid onto the paper P and performing printing, even when general-purpose printing paper is used, the spread and / or movement of ink is suppressed, and high-quality images can be formed. It becomes possible. The treatment liquid may be referred to by terms such as a pretreatment liquid, a precoat liquid, or a preconditioning liquid.
 処理液塗布部20は、処理液塗布ドラム21と、処理液塗布装置22と、を備える。処理液塗布ドラム21は、給紙ドラム13から受け取った用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送して、処理液乾燥ドラム31に受け渡す。処理液塗布ドラム21は、そのドラム周面に図示せぬグリッパーを備える。処理液塗布ドラム21は、図示せぬグリッパーによって用紙Pの先端を把持して回転することにより、用紙Pをドラム周面に巻き掛けて搬送する。 The treatment liquid application unit 20 includes a treatment liquid application drum 21 and a treatment liquid application device 22. The treatment liquid application drum 21 conveys the paper P received from the paper supply drum 13 along a certain conveyance path and delivers it to the treatment liquid drying drum 31. The treatment liquid coating drum 21 includes a gripper (not shown) on the peripheral surface of the drum. The treatment liquid coating drum 21 grips and rotates the leading end of the paper P with a gripper (not shown), thereby winding and transporting the paper P around the drum peripheral surface.
 処理液塗布装置22は、処理液塗布ドラム21によって搬送される用紙Pの第一面に処理液を塗布する。用紙Pの第一面は、インクによって画像が形成される画像形成面に相当する。画像形成面は印刷面と同義である。用紙Pの第一面と反対側の面を第二面という。本例の処理液塗布装置22は、ローラー塗布方式により、処理液を用紙Pに塗布する。すなわち、処理液塗布装置22は、塗布ローラーを含み、周面に処理液が付与された塗布ローラーを用紙Pの印刷面に押し当てて、用紙Pに処理液を塗布する。なお、処理液塗布装置22の塗布方式は、特に限定されるものではなく、ローラー塗布方式に代えて、インクジェット方式、又はスプレイ方式などの他の塗布方式を採用してもよい。 The processing liquid coating device 22 applies the processing liquid to the first surface of the paper P conveyed by the processing liquid coating drum 21. The first surface of the paper P corresponds to an image forming surface on which an image is formed with ink. The image forming surface is synonymous with the printing surface. The surface opposite to the first surface of the paper P is referred to as the second surface. The processing liquid coating apparatus 22 of this example applies the processing liquid to the paper P by a roller coating method. That is, the processing liquid coating apparatus 22 includes a coating roller, and applies the processing liquid to the paper P by pressing the coating roller with the processing liquid applied to the peripheral surface against the printing surface of the paper P. In addition, the coating method of the treatment liquid coating apparatus 22 is not particularly limited, and another coating method such as an inkjet method or a spray method may be employed instead of the roller coating method.
 〈処理液乾燥部〉
 処理液乾燥部30は、用紙Pに塗布された処理液を乾燥させる。処理液乾燥部30は、処理液乾燥ドラム31と、第一用紙ガイド32と、ドライヤー33と、を備える。
<Processing liquid drying section>
The treatment liquid drying unit 30 dries the treatment liquid applied to the paper P. The processing liquid drying unit 30 includes a processing liquid drying drum 31, a first paper guide 32, and a dryer 33.
 処理液乾燥ドラム31は、処理液塗布ドラム21から受け取った用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送して、画像形成ドラム41に受け渡す。処理液乾燥ドラム31は、そのドラム周面に図示せぬグリッパーを備えている。給紙ドラム13は、図示せぬグリッパーによって用紙Pの先端を把持して回転することにより、用紙Pをドラム周面に巻き掛けて搬送する。 The treatment liquid drying drum 31 conveys the paper P received from the treatment liquid application drum 21 along a certain conveyance path and delivers it to the image forming drum 41. The treatment liquid drying drum 31 includes a gripper (not shown) on the peripheral surface of the drum. The paper feed drum 13 conveys the paper P around the drum circumferential surface by gripping and rotating the leading edge of the paper P with a gripper (not shown).
 第一用紙ガイド32は、処理液乾燥ドラム31による用紙Pの搬送経路に沿って配置され、用紙Pの搬送をガイドする。用紙Pは、第一用紙ガイド32の上を摺動しながら搬送される。 The first paper guide 32 is arranged along the transport path of the paper P by the treatment liquid drying drum 31 and guides the transport of the paper P. The paper P is conveyed while sliding on the first paper guide 32.
 ドライヤー33は、処理液乾燥ドラム31によって搬送される用紙Pの第一面に熱風を吹き付けて、処理液が塗布された用紙Pの第一面を加熱する。ドライヤー33は、処理液乾燥ドラム31の内側に配置される。ドライヤー33は、例えば、ハロゲンヒーター、又は赤外線ヒーター等の熱源と、その熱源によって熱せられた気体を送風する送風手段と、を備える。熱源によって熱せられる気体は、例えば空気である。空気に代えて、又は空気に加えて他の気体を用いてもよい。 The dryer 33 blows hot air onto the first surface of the paper P conveyed by the processing liquid drying drum 31 to heat the first surface of the paper P coated with the processing liquid. The dryer 33 is disposed inside the processing liquid drying drum 31. The dryer 33 includes, for example, a heat source such as a halogen heater or an infrared heater, and a blowing unit that blows the gas heated by the heat source. The gas heated by the heat source is, for example, air. Other gases may be used instead of or in addition to air.
 送風手段として、例えば、ファン若しくはブロアを用いることができる。ドライヤー33がヒーターと送風手段とを含んで構成される場合、ヒーターの点灯本数、及び/又は点灯デューティー比の少なくともいずれか一方の調整により、加熱強度を制御することができる。 As the air blowing means, for example, a fan or a blower can be used. When the dryer 33 is configured to include a heater and air blowing means, the heating intensity can be controlled by adjusting at least one of the number of lighting heaters and / or the lighting duty ratio.
 用紙Pは、処理液乾燥ドラム31によって搬送される過程で第一面にドライヤー33からの熱風が吹き付けられる。これにより、用紙Pの処理液塗布面である第一面が加熱され、用紙Pに付与された処理液の溶媒成分が乾燥除去される。この結果、用紙Pの第一面にインク凝集層が形成される。インク凝集層とは、処理液中に含まれるインク凝集剤の層をいう。処理液乾燥部30によって、処理液中の水分が蒸発し、処理液のインク凝集剤の薄膜層であるインク凝集層が用紙Pの第一面に形成される。 The hot air from the dryer 33 is blown onto the first surface of the paper P in the process of being conveyed by the treatment liquid drying drum 31. As a result, the first surface, which is the treatment liquid application surface of the paper P, is heated, and the solvent component of the treatment liquid applied to the paper P is removed by drying. As a result, an ink aggregation layer is formed on the first surface of the paper P. The ink aggregating layer refers to a layer of an ink aggregating agent contained in the processing liquid. The water in the processing liquid evaporates by the processing liquid drying unit 30, and an ink aggregation layer that is a thin film layer of the ink aggregation agent of the processing liquid is formed on the first surface of the paper P.
 〈画像形成部〉
 画像形成部40は、インクジェット方式によって用紙Pの第一面に画像を形成する。画像形成部40は、画像形成ドラム41と、用紙押さえローラー42と、インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kと、スキャナー44と、を備える。
<Image forming part>
The image forming unit 40 forms an image on the first surface of the paper P by an inkjet method. The image forming unit 40 includes an image forming drum 41, a sheet pressing roller 42, ink jet heads 43 </ b> C, 43 </ b> M, 43 </ b> Y, 43 </ b> K, and a scanner 44.
 画像形成ドラム41は、処理液乾燥ドラム31から用紙Pを受け取り、受け取った用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送し、第一チェーンデリバリー51に受け渡す。画像形成ドラム41は、周面に備えられた図示せぬグリッパーによって用紙Pの先端を把持して回転することにより、用紙Pを周面に巻き付けて搬送する。 The image forming drum 41 receives the paper P from the processing liquid drying drum 31, transports the received paper P along a certain transport path, and delivers it to the first chain delivery 51. The image forming drum 41 grips and rotates the front end of the paper P with a gripper (not shown) provided on the peripheral surface, thereby winding and transporting the paper P around the peripheral surface.
 画像形成ドラム41の周面には、用紙吸着のための図示しない吸着穴が多数形成されており、吸着穴に発生させた負圧によって用紙Pが画像形成ドラム41の周面に吸着保持される。なお、画像形成ドラム41は、負圧吸引によって用紙Pを吸着固定する構成に限らず、例えば、静電吸着により用紙Pを吸着保持する構成とすることもできる。 A large number of suction holes (not shown) for adsorbing paper are formed on the peripheral surface of the image forming drum 41, and the paper P is adsorbed and held on the peripheral surface of the image forming drum 41 by the negative pressure generated in the suction holes. . Note that the image forming drum 41 is not limited to the configuration in which the paper P is sucked and fixed by negative pressure suction, and may be configured to suck and hold the paper P by electrostatic suction, for example.
 用紙押さえローラー42は、用紙Pを画像形成ドラム41の周面に押し付けて、画像形成ドラム41の周面に密着させる。 The paper pressing roller 42 presses the paper P against the peripheral surface of the image forming drum 41 and closely contacts the peripheral surface of the image forming drum 41.
 インクジェットヘッド43Cは、シアン(C)のインクの液滴を吐出する記録ヘッドである。インクジェットヘッド43Mは、マゼンタ(M)のインクの液滴を吐出する記録ヘッドである。インクジェットヘッド43Yは、イエロー(Y)のインクの液滴を吐出する記録ヘッドである。インクジェットヘッド43Kは、ブラック(K)のインクの液滴を吐出する記録ヘッドである。 The inkjet head 43C is a recording head that discharges cyan (C) ink droplets. The inkjet head 43M is a recording head that ejects magenta (M) ink droplets. The inkjet head 43Y is a recording head that discharges yellow (Y) ink droplets. The inkjet head 43K is a recording head that ejects black (K) ink droplets.
 インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kのそれぞれには、対応する色のインク供給源である不図示のインクタンクから不図示の配管経路を介して、インクが供給される。インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kの各々は、ライン型のインクジェットヘッドで構成される。すなわち、インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kは、最大の用紙幅の描画可能範囲に対応する長さにわたってノズルが配列されたノズル列を有するラインヘッドで構成される。 Each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K is supplied with ink from an ink tank (not shown) that is an ink supply source of a corresponding color via a pipe path (not shown). Each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K is a line-type inkjet head. That is, the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K are constituted by line heads having nozzle rows in which nozzles are arranged over a length corresponding to the drawable range of the maximum paper width.
 図1には示さないが、インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kの各々のノズル面には、インクの吐出口である複数個のノズルが二次元配列されている。「ノズル面」とは、ノズルが形成されている吐出面をいい、「インク吐出面」或いは「ノズル形成面」などの用語と同義である。二次元配列された複数個のノズルのノズル配列を「二次元ノズル配列」という。 Although not shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of nozzles serving as ink ejection openings are two-dimensionally arranged on the nozzle surfaces of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K. “Nozzle surface” refers to an ejection surface on which nozzles are formed, and is synonymous with terms such as “ink ejection surface” or “nozzle formation surface”. A nozzle arrangement of a plurality of nozzles arranged two-dimensionally is called a “two-dimensional nozzle arrangement”.
 インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kの各々は、複数個のヘッドモジュールを用紙幅方向に繋ぎ合わせて構成することができる。ここでいう用紙幅は、用紙Pの搬送方向と直交する方向の用紙幅を指す。インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kの各々は、用紙Pの搬送方向と直交する用紙幅方向に関して、用紙Pの全記録領域を、1回の走査で規定の記録解像度による画像記録が可能なノズル列を有するライン型の記録ヘッドである。このような記録ヘッドは「フルライン型の記録ヘッド」或いは「ページワイドヘッド」とも呼ばれる。 Each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K can be configured by connecting a plurality of head modules in the paper width direction. The paper width here refers to the paper width in a direction orthogonal to the conveyance direction of the paper P. Each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K is a nozzle capable of recording an image with a specified recording resolution in one scan of the entire recording area of the paper P in the paper width direction orthogonal to the transport direction of the paper P. This is a line type recording head having columns. Such a recording head is also called a “full line type recording head” or a “page wide head”.
 二次元ノズル配列を有するインクジェットヘッドの場合、二次元ノズル配列における各ノズルをノズル列方向に沿って並ぶように投影(正射影)した投影ノズル列は、ノズル列方向について、最大の記録解像度を達成するノズル密度で各ノズルが概ね等間隔で並ぶ一列のノズル列と等価なものと考えることができる。「概ね等間隔」とは、インクジェット印刷装置で記録可能な打滴点として実質的に等間隔であることを意味している。例えば、製造上の誤差及び/又は着弾干渉による媒体上での液滴の移動を考慮して僅かに間隔を異ならせたものなどが含まれている場合も「等間隔」の概念に含まれる。投影ノズル列は実質的なノズル列に相当する。投影ノズル列を考慮すると、ノズル列方向に沿って並ぶ投影ノズルの並び順に、各ノズルにノズル位置を表すノズル番号を対応付けることができる。 In the case of an inkjet head having a two-dimensional nozzle array, the projection nozzle array in which the nozzles in the two-dimensional nozzle array are projected (orthographically projected) along the nozzle array direction achieves the maximum recording resolution in the nozzle array direction. It can be considered that the nozzle density is equivalent to a single nozzle row in which each nozzle is arranged at approximately equal intervals. The “substantially equidistant” means that the droplet ejection points that can be recorded by the ink jet printing apparatus are substantially equidistant. For example, the concept of “equally spaced” includes a case where the distance is slightly different in consideration of manufacturing errors and / or movement of droplets on the medium due to landing interference. The projection nozzle row corresponds to a substantial nozzle row. Considering the projection nozzle row, it is possible to associate a nozzle number representing the nozzle position with each nozzle in the arrangement order of the projection nozzles arranged along the nozzle row direction.
 インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kの各々におけるノズルの配列形態は限定されず、様々なノズル配列の形態を採用することができる。例えば、マトリクス状の二次元配列の形態に代えて、一列の直線配列、V字状のノズル配列、V字状配列を繰り返し単位とするW字状などのような折れ線状のノズル配列なども可能である。 The nozzle arrangement form in each of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K is not limited, and various nozzle arrangement forms can be adopted. For example, instead of a matrix-like two-dimensional array, a linear array of lines, a V-shaped nozzle array, a polygonal nozzle array such as a W-shape with a V-shaped array as a repeating unit, and the like are also possible. It is.
 インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kは、用紙Pの搬送経路上に一定の間隔をもって配置され、かつ、インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kは、用紙Pの搬送方向と直交する方向に延在するように設置される。用紙Pの搬送方向と直交する方向は、画像形成ドラム41の回転軸と平行な方向である。 The inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K are arranged on the conveyance path of the paper P at a constant interval, and the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K extend in a direction orthogonal to the conveyance direction of the paper P. To be installed. The direction orthogonal to the transport direction of the paper P is a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the image forming drum 41.
 画像形成ドラム41によって搬送される用紙Pに向けて、インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kのうち少なくとも1つのヘッドからインクの液滴が吐出され、吐出された液滴が用紙Pに付着することにより、用紙Pに画像が形成される。 Ink droplets are ejected from at least one of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K toward the paper P conveyed by the image forming drum 41, and the ejected droplets adhere to the paper P. Thus, an image is formed on the paper P.
 本例では、CMYKの4色のインクを用いる構成を例示したが、インク色及び色数の組み合わせについては本実施形態に限定されず、必要に応じて淡インク、濃インク、特色インクなどを追加してもよい。例えば、ライトシアン、ライトマゼンタなどのライト系インクを吐出するインクジェットヘッドを追加する構成、及び/又は、緑色若しくはオレンジ色などの特色のインクを吐出するインクジェットヘッドを追加する構成なども可能である。また、各色のインクジェットヘッドの配置順序も特に限定はない。 In this example, a configuration using four colors of CMYK is illustrated, but the combination of ink color and number of colors is not limited to this embodiment, and light ink, dark ink, special color ink, etc. are added as necessary. May be. For example, a configuration in which an inkjet head that ejects light-colored ink such as light cyan and light magenta is added, and / or a configuration in which an inkjet head that ejects a special color ink such as green or orange is added. Also, the arrangement order of the ink jet heads for each color is not particularly limited.
 スキャナー44は、インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kによって用紙Pに形成された画像を光学的に読み取り、その読取画像を示す電子画像データを生成する装置である。スキャナー44は、用紙P上に記録された画像を撮像して画像情報を示す電気信号に変換する撮像デバイスを含む。撮像デバイスとしてカラーCCDリニアイメージセンサを用いることができる。CCDは、Charge-Coupled Deviceの略語であり、電荷結合素子を指す。なお、カラーCCDリニアイメージセンサに代えて、カラーCMOSリニアイメージセンサを用いることもできる。CMOSは、Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductorの略語であり、相補型金属酸化膜半導体を指す。 The scanner 44 is an apparatus that optically reads an image formed on the paper P by the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K, and generates electronic image data indicating the read image. The scanner 44 includes an imaging device that captures an image recorded on the paper P and converts it into an electrical signal indicating image information. A color CCD linear image sensor can be used as the imaging device. CCD is an abbreviation for Charge-Coupled Device and refers to a charge coupled device. Instead of the color CCD linear image sensor, a color CMOS linear image sensor can be used. CMOS is an abbreviation for Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor and refers to a complementary metal oxide semiconductor.
 スキャナー44は、撮像デバイスの他、読み取り対象を照明する照明光学系及び撮像デバイスから得られる信号を処理してデジタル画像データを生成する信号処理回路を含んでよい。 The scanner 44 may include, in addition to the imaging device, an illumination optical system that illuminates a reading target and a signal processing circuit that processes a signal obtained from the imaging device and generates digital image data.
 スキャナー44は、インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kのうち、用紙Pの搬送方向に対して最下流に位置するインクジェットヘッド43Kの下流側に配置される。スキャナー44は、画像形成ドラム41による用紙Pの搬送中に用紙P上の画像の読み取りを行う。 The scanner 44 is arranged on the downstream side of the inkjet head 43K located on the most downstream side in the transport direction of the paper P among the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K. The scanner 44 reads an image on the paper P while the paper P is being conveyed by the image forming drum 41.
 インクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kの少なくとも1つを用いて画像が形成された用紙Pは、スキャナー44の読取領域を通過する際に、用紙P上の画像が読み取られる。用紙Pに形成される画像としては、印刷ジョブで指定される印刷対象の画像の他、ノズルごとの吐出状態を検査するための不良ノズル検知パターン、印刷濃度補正用テストパターン、印刷濃度ムラ補正用テストパターン、その他の各種のテストパターンが含まれ得る。 When the paper P on which the image is formed using at least one of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K passes through the reading area of the scanner 44, the image on the paper P is read. As the image formed on the paper P, in addition to the image to be printed specified in the print job, a defective nozzle detection pattern for inspecting the ejection state of each nozzle, a test pattern for correcting print density, and for correcting print density unevenness Test patterns and other various test patterns can be included.
 スキャナー44によって読み取られた読取画像のデータを基に、印刷画像の検査が行われ、画質異常の有無が判断される。また、スキャナー44によって読み取られた読取画像のデータを基に、印刷画像の濃度やインクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kの吐出不良などの情報を得ることができる。 The print image is inspected based on the read image data read by the scanner 44, and it is determined whether there is an abnormality in image quality. Further, based on the read image data read by the scanner 44, it is possible to obtain information such as the density of the print image and ejection defects of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K.
 〈インク乾燥部〉
 インク乾燥部50は、画像形成後の用紙Pを加熱して、インクを乾燥させる。インク乾燥部50は、第一チェーンデリバリー51と、第二用紙ガイド52と、第一加熱装置53と、を備える。
<Ink drying section>
The ink drying unit 50 heats the paper P after image formation to dry the ink. The ink drying unit 50 includes a first chain delivery 51, a second paper guide 52, and a first heating device 53.
 第一チェーンデリバリー51は、画像形成ドラム41から受け取った用紙Pを所定の搬送経路に沿って搬送して、ニス塗布ドラム61に受け渡す。第一チェーンデリバリー51は、一定の走行経路に沿って走行する一対の無端状のチェーンを備え、その一対のチェーンに掛け渡された図示せぬグリッパーによって用紙Pの先端を把持して、用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送する。 The first chain delivery 51 conveys the paper P received from the image forming drum 41 along a predetermined conveyance path, and delivers it to the varnish application drum 61. The first chain delivery 51 includes a pair of endless chains that travel along a certain travel route, and grips the leading edge of the paper P with a gripper (not shown) that spans the pair of chains. Is transported along a certain transport path.
 第二用紙ガイド52は、第一チェーンデリバリー51によって搬送される用紙Pの走行をガイドする。第二用紙ガイド52は、中空のボード形状を有し、用紙Pの搬送経路に沿って平坦なガイド面を有する。用紙Pは、第二用紙ガイド52のガイド面の上を摺動しながら搬送される。第二用紙ガイド52のガイド面は、図示せぬ多数の吸引穴を備えている。用紙Pは、吸引穴から吸引されながら、第二用紙ガイド52のガイド面上を摺動する。これにより、用紙Pに張力を与えながら用紙Pを搬送できる。 The second paper guide 52 guides the travel of the paper P conveyed by the first chain delivery 51. The second paper guide 52 has a hollow board shape and has a flat guide surface along the paper P conveyance path. The paper P is conveyed while sliding on the guide surface of the second paper guide 52. The guide surface of the second paper guide 52 has a number of suction holes (not shown). The sheet P slides on the guide surface of the second sheet guide 52 while being sucked from the suction hole. Thereby, the paper P can be conveyed while applying tension to the paper P.
 第一加熱装置53は、第一チェーンデリバリー51によって搬送される用紙Pの画像表面を加熱して、インクを乾燥させる。第一加熱装置53は、例えば、棒状のヒーターを用紙Pの搬送方向に沿って一定の間隔で複数本配置して構成される。各ヒーターは、用紙Pの搬送方向と直交して配置される。ヒーターには、例えば、ハロゲンヒーターや赤外線ヒーターが使用される。第一加熱装置53は、ファン又はブロアなどの送風手段を含んでいてもよい。第一加熱装置53は、ヒーターの点灯本数、及び/又は、点灯デューティー比によって、乾燥させる強さの度合を示す乾燥強度が調節される。 The first heating device 53 heats the image surface of the paper P conveyed by the first chain delivery 51 to dry the ink. For example, the first heating device 53 is configured by arranging a plurality of rod-shaped heaters at regular intervals along the conveyance direction of the paper P. Each heater is disposed orthogonal to the conveyance direction of the paper P. For example, a halogen heater or an infrared heater is used as the heater. The first heating device 53 may include a blowing unit such as a fan or a blower. In the first heating device 53, the drying intensity indicating the strength of drying is adjusted by the number of lighting heaters and / or the lighting duty ratio.
 用紙Pは、第一チェーンデリバリー51によって搬送される過程で第一加熱装置53によって画像表面が加熱され、インクが乾燥される。 In the process of being conveyed by the first chain delivery 51, the image surface of the paper P is heated by the first heating device 53, and the ink is dried.
 インクジェット印刷装置1は、インク乾燥部50におけるインク乾燥条件を適切に制御するために、第一温度検出部56を備える。第一温度検出部56は、第一加熱装置53を用いて乾燥処理が施された用紙Pの温度を検出する。第一温度検出部56を用いて検出される用紙Pの温度は、例えば、用紙Pの表面温度である。第一温度検出部56には、非接触式の温度センサを用いることができる。 The inkjet printing apparatus 1 includes a first temperature detection unit 56 in order to appropriately control ink drying conditions in the ink drying unit 50. The first temperature detection unit 56 detects the temperature of the paper P that has been dried using the first heating device 53. The temperature of the paper P detected using the first temperature detection unit 56 is, for example, the surface temperature of the paper P. A non-contact temperature sensor can be used for the first temperature detection unit 56.
 第一温度検出部56は、第一加熱装置53よりも用紙搬送経路の下流側、かつ、ニス塗布部60に用紙Pを受け渡す手前の位置に配置される。第一温度検出部56を用いて検出される温度情報に基づき、第一加熱装置53の動作が制御される。 The first temperature detection unit 56 is disposed downstream of the first heating device 53 in the paper conveyance path and at a position before the paper P is delivered to the varnish application unit 60. Based on the temperature information detected using the first temperature detection unit 56, the operation of the first heating device 53 is controlled.
 〈ニス塗布部〉
 ニス塗布部60は、画像形成後の用紙Pの画像表面にニスを塗布する。本実施形態で用いるニスは水性ニスである。水性ニスとは、水溶性のニスである。ニス塗布部60は、ニス塗布ドラム61と、ニスコーター90と、を備える。
<Varnish application part>
The varnish application unit 60 applies varnish to the image surface of the paper P after image formation. The varnish used in this embodiment is an aqueous varnish. An aqueous varnish is a water-soluble varnish. The varnish application unit 60 includes a varnish application drum 61 and a varnish coater 90.
 ニス塗布ドラム61は、第一チェーンデリバリー51から用紙Pを受け取り、受け取った用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送し、第二チェーンデリバリー71に受け渡す。ニス塗布ドラム61は、ドラム周面に備えられた図示せぬグリッパーによって用紙Pの先端を把持して回転することにより、用紙Pを周面に巻き付けて搬送する。 The varnish application drum 61 receives the paper P from the first chain delivery 51, transports the received paper P along a certain transport path, and delivers it to the second chain delivery 71. The varnish application drum 61 is conveyed by winding the paper P around the peripheral surface by gripping and rotating the leading end of the paper P with a gripper (not shown) provided on the peripheral surface of the drum.
 ニスコーター90の構成例として、ニス槽、汲み上げローラー、計量ブレード、1つ以上の中間転写ローラー、及びニス塗布ローラーを備える構成が挙げられる。ニスコーター90の構成は特に限定されず、ドクターチャンバーとニス塗布ローラーとを備えた構成であってもよい。 Examples of the configuration of the varnish coater 90 include a configuration including a varnish tank, a drawing roller, a measuring blade, one or more intermediate transfer rollers, and a varnish application roller. The configuration of the varnish coater 90 is not particularly limited, and may include a doctor chamber and a varnish application roller.
 画像形成後の用紙Pをニスコートする場合、用紙Pは、ニス塗布ドラム61に搬送される過程で画像形成面(第一面)にニス塗布ローラーが押圧当接されて、画像形成面にニスが塗布される。 When varnishing the paper P after image formation, the varnish application roller is pressed against the image forming surface (first surface) in the process of being conveyed to the varnish application drum 61 and the varnish is applied to the image forming surface. Applied.
 〈ニス後処理部〉
 ニス後処理部70は、ニス塗布部60で用紙Pの画像表面に塗布されたニスの後処理を行う。水性ニスが使用される場合は、ニスの後処理として、加熱乾燥処理が施される。ここでいう加熱乾燥処理は、ニスが塗布された用紙Pの画像表面を加熱して、ニスを乾燥させる処理、すなわち、ニス中の水分又は溶剤を揮発させる処理である。これにより、ニス層の表面のべたつきを抑制し、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する。
<Variet aftertreatment>
The varnish post-processing unit 70 performs post-processing of the varnish applied to the image surface of the paper P by the varnish application unit 60. When an aqueous varnish is used, a heat drying process is performed as a post-treatment of the varnish. The heat drying process here is a process of heating the image surface of the paper P coated with varnish to dry the varnish, that is, a process of volatilizing moisture or solvent in the varnish. Thereby, the stickiness of the surface of a varnish layer is suppressed and generation | occurrence | production of blocking is suppressed.
 ニス後処理部70は、第二チェーンデリバリー71と、第三用紙ガイド72と、第二加熱装置70Aとを備える。 The varnish post-processing unit 70 includes a second chain delivery 71, a third paper guide 72, and a second heating device 70A.
 第二チェーンデリバリー71は、ニス塗布ドラム61から用紙Pを受け取り、受け取った用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送し、排紙位置で排紙する。第二チェーンデリバリー71は、一定の走行経路に沿って走行する一対の無端状のチェーンを備え、その一対のチェーンに掛け渡された図示せぬグリッパーによって用紙Pの先端を把持して、用紙Pを一定の搬送経路に沿って搬送する。 The second chain delivery 71 receives the paper P from the varnish application drum 61, transports the received paper P along a certain transport path, and discharges it at the paper discharge position. The second chain delivery 71 includes a pair of endless chains that travel along a certain travel route, and grips the leading end of the paper P with a gripper (not shown) that is stretched over the pair of chains. Is transported along a certain transport path.
 第三用紙ガイド72は、第二チェーンデリバリー71によって搬送される用紙Pの走行をガイドする。第三用紙ガイド72は、中空のボード形状を有し、用紙Pの搬送経路に沿って平坦なガイド面を有する。用紙Pは、第三用紙ガイド72のガイド面の上を摺動しながら搬送される。第三用紙ガイド72のガイド面は、多数の吸引穴を備えている。用紙Pは、吸引穴から吸引されながら、ガイド面上を摺動する。これにより、用紙Pに張力を与えながら用紙Pを搬送できる。 The third paper guide 72 guides the travel of the paper P conveyed by the second chain delivery 71. The third paper guide 72 has a hollow board shape and has a flat guide surface along the paper P conveyance path. The paper P is conveyed while sliding on the guide surface of the third paper guide 72. The guide surface of the third paper guide 72 has a number of suction holes. The sheet P slides on the guide surface while being sucked from the suction hole. Thereby, the paper P can be conveyed while applying tension to the paper P.
 第二加熱装置70Aは、第二チェーンデリバリー71によって搬送される用紙Pの画像表面を加熱して、画像表面に塗布されたニスを乾燥させる。第二加熱装置70Aは、第一加熱装置53と同様の構成が適用可能である。 The second heating device 70A heats the image surface of the paper P conveyed by the second chain delivery 71, and dries the varnish applied to the image surface. A configuration similar to that of the first heating device 53 can be applied to the second heating device 70A.
 水性ニスが塗布された用紙Pは、第二チェーンデリバリー71によって搬送される過程で第二加熱装置70Aによって画像表面が加熱され、塗布されたニスが乾燥される。 The sheet P coated with the aqueous varnish is heated by the second heating device 70A in the process of being conveyed by the second chain delivery 71, and the coated varnish is dried.
 ニス後処理部70は、用紙Pに塗布されたニスを冷却する図示せぬ冷却処理部を備えていてもよい。冷却処理部の構成例として、送風ファンが備えられる構成が挙げられる。ニスに対して冷却処理が施されることで、ニスの粘度を上昇させることができる。ニスの粘度を上昇させることで、インクの溶媒がニス中に混入されることが抑制され、ニスのべたつきの抑制が可能となる。 The varnish post-processing unit 70 may include a cooling processing unit (not shown) that cools the varnish applied to the paper P. As a configuration example of the cooling processing unit, a configuration in which a blower fan is provided can be given. By subjecting the varnish to a cooling treatment, the viscosity of the varnish can be increased. By increasing the viscosity of the varnish, the ink solvent is prevented from being mixed into the varnish, and the stickiness of the varnish can be suppressed.
 インクジェット印刷装置1は、ニス後処理部70におけるニス乾燥条件を適切に制御するために、第二温度検出部94を備える。第二温度検出部94は、第二加熱装置70Aを用いてニスの後処理が施された後の用紙Pの温度を検出する。第二温度検出部94を用いて検出される用紙Pの温度は、例えば、用紙Pの表面温度である。第二温度検出部94には、非接触式の温度センサを用いることができる。 The inkjet printing apparatus 1 includes a second temperature detection unit 94 in order to appropriately control the varnish drying conditions in the varnish post-processing unit 70. The second temperature detection unit 94 detects the temperature of the paper P after the varnish post-processing is performed using the second heating device 70A. The temperature of the paper P detected using the second temperature detection unit 94 is, for example, the surface temperature of the paper P. A non-contact temperature sensor can be used for the second temperature detection unit 94.
 第二温度検出部94は、第二加熱装置70Aよりも用紙搬送経路の下流側、かつ、集積部80の手前の位置に配置される。第二温度検出部94を用いて検出される温度情報に基づき、第二加熱装置70Aの動作が制御される。 The second temperature detection unit 94 is disposed at a position downstream of the second heating device 70A on the downstream side of the sheet conveyance path and in front of the stacking unit 80. Based on the temperature information detected using the second temperature detector 94, the operation of the second heating device 70A is controlled.
 〈集積部〉
 集積部80は、排紙される用紙Pをスタック(stack)する。集積部80は、集積装置81を備える。集積装置81は、所定の排紙位置で第二チェーンデリバリー71から開放される用紙Pを受け取り、排紙台の上に用紙Pを積み重ねて回収する。
<Accumulation part>
The stacking unit 80 stacks the discharged paper P. The stacking unit 80 includes a stacking device 81. The stacking device 81 receives the paper P released from the second chain delivery 71 at a predetermined paper discharge position, and stacks and collects the paper P on the paper discharge table.
 〈パウダー噴霧部〉
 インクジェット印刷装置1は、パウダー噴霧部96を備えている。パウダー噴霧部96は、集積部80にスタックされる用紙Pにパウダーを噴霧する。パウダーは、ブロッキング抑止効果を持つ粉末である。パウダーとして、印刷分野において使用されているブロッキング防止パウダーを用いることが可能である。パウダーは「ブロッキング防止剤」と呼ばれる場合がある。パウダーは、無機粒子、又は有機粒子のいずれであってもよい。パウダーの例として、シリコーン樹脂をコーティングした澱粉、シリカ、アクリル系樹脂、スチレン系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、及び金属酸化物からなる群から選ばれる材料の粒子が好ましい。
<Powder spraying part>
The ink jet printing apparatus 1 includes a powder spray unit 96. The powder spraying unit 96 sprays the powder onto the paper P stacked on the stacking unit 80. The powder is a powder having a blocking deterrent effect. As the powder, an anti-blocking powder used in the printing field can be used. The powder is sometimes referred to as an “antiblocking agent”. The powder may be either inorganic particles or organic particles. As an example of the powder, particles of a material selected from the group consisting of starch coated with a silicone resin, silica, acrylic resin, styrene resin, silicone resin, and metal oxide are preferable.
 アクリル系樹脂の例として、ポリメチルアクリレート、及びポリメチルメタアクリレートが挙げられる。スチレン系樹脂の例として、ポリスチレンが挙げられる。金属酸化物の例として、酸化チタン、酸化マグネシウム、及び酸化アルミニウムが挙げられる。 Examples of acrylic resins include polymethyl acrylate and polymethyl methacrylate. An example of the styrene resin is polystyrene. Examples of metal oxides include titanium oxide, magnesium oxide, and aluminum oxide.
 インクジェット方式の画像形成に用いられるインクは、インクジェット方式以外の印刷方式において用いられるインクに比べて水の含有量が高い。したがって、インクジェット印刷装置1において、印刷物の耐擦性を高め、かつ、画像における画像欠陥の発生を防ぐためには、パウダーは疎水性であることが好ましい。例えば、シリコーン樹脂でコーティング処理した澱粉などの疎水処理されているパウダーが更に好ましい。 The ink used for inkjet image formation has a higher water content than the ink used in printing methods other than the inkjet method. Therefore, in the ink jet printing apparatus 1, it is preferable that the powder is hydrophobic in order to increase the abrasion resistance of the printed matter and prevent the occurrence of image defects in the image. For example, a powder subjected to hydrophobic treatment such as starch coated with a silicone resin is more preferable.
 図1に示されたパウダー噴霧部96は、用紙Pの搬送経路において第二温度検出部94よりも用紙搬送方向の下流側の位置に配置される。パウダー噴霧部96は、集積部80にスタックされる前の用紙Pに、又は、集積部80に載せた後の用紙Pにパウダーを噴霧する。 1 is arranged at a position downstream of the second temperature detection unit 94 in the paper conveyance direction in the conveyance path of the paper P. The powder spraying unit 96 shown in FIG. The powder spraying unit 96 sprays the powder onto the paper P before being stacked on the stacking unit 80 or onto the paper P after being placed on the stacking unit 80.
 パウダー噴霧部96には、印刷分野においてパウダーの付与手段として用いられているパウダースプレーノズルを適用可能である。パウダー噴霧部96は、ブロワー式、又は電子噴霧式などの方式が適用可能である。 A powder spray nozzle that is used as a powder applying means in the printing field can be applied to the powder spray unit 96. As the powder spraying part 96, a blower type or an electronic spraying type can be applied.
 《集積部におけるブロッキングの問題》
 水性ニスを塗布した後の印刷物を積み重ねる場合、水性ニス表面と用紙との接着力は、水性ニスと接する用紙にかかる荷重が大きいほど強くなる。水性ニスを塗布した後の印刷物は、集積部に1枚ずつスタックされていく。このため、スタック束の最下層にある用紙にかかる荷重は、スタック枚数の増加とともに増加していく。つまり、複数枚の印刷を実行する場合、スタック束の最下層にある用紙にかかる荷重は、時間の経過とともに増加していく。
《Blocking problem in the accumulation part》
When stacking the printed matter after applying the aqueous varnish, the adhesive force between the aqueous varnish surface and the paper increases as the load applied to the paper in contact with the aqueous varnish increases. The printed matter after applying the aqueous varnish is stacked one by one on the accumulating part. For this reason, the load applied to the sheet in the lowermost layer of the stack bundle increases as the number of stacks increases. That is, when printing a plurality of sheets, the load applied to the sheet in the lowermost layer of the stack bundle increases with time.
 用紙にかかる荷重が、ある規定の荷重を超えると「許容接着力」を超えてしまい、ニスの接着力に用紙のコート層の強度が負けて、用紙剥離の際にコート層が破断し、ブロッキングが発生する場合がある。その一方で、用紙にかかる荷重が「許容接着力」を超えなければ、ニスの接着力に用紙のコート層が負けることがないため、用紙剥離の際にコート層は破断せず、ブロッキングは発生しない。 When the load applied to the paper exceeds a specified load, it exceeds the `` allowable adhesive strength '', the strength of the paper coat layer is lost against the adhesive strength of the varnish, and the coat layer breaks when the paper is peeled off, blocking May occur. On the other hand, if the load applied to the paper does not exceed the “allowable adhesive strength”, the coating layer of the paper will not be defeated by the adhesive strength of the varnish. do not do.
 画像形成後に画像表面に塗布されたニスの表面のべたつきによる接着力は、時間の経過に伴い、ニス層から溶剤が抜けていくため、徐々に減っていく。スタック中の用紙束における最下層に位置する用紙のニス表面にかかる荷重は、スタック速度が速くなるほど、及び/又は、用紙の坪量が大きいものほど、荷重増加速度が大きくなる。荷重増加速度とは、単位時間あたりに用紙にかかる荷重の増える量を意味する。なお、坪量とは、単位面積あたりの用紙の質量を意味する。坪量は、通常、1平方メートルあたりの用紙の質量で表され、「g/m」の単位が用いられる。用紙が重いほど、用紙の厚みが増す傾向にあるため、坪量は「用紙の厚み」と同等の意味で使用される。 The adhesive force due to the stickiness of the surface of the varnish applied to the image surface after the image formation is gradually reduced as the solvent escapes from the varnish layer over time. The load applied to the varnish surface of the paper located in the lowermost layer in the stack of paper in the stack increases as the stack speed increases and / or as the paper basis weight increases, the load increasing speed increases. The load increase rate means an amount of increase in load applied to the paper per unit time. The basis weight means the mass of paper per unit area. The basis weight is usually expressed by the mass of paper per square meter, and the unit of “g / m 2 ” is used. As the paper is heavier, the paper thickness tends to increase, so the basis weight is used in the same meaning as “paper thickness”.
 図2は、水性ニスが塗布された印刷物を積み重ねる場合におけるスタック中のニス表面と用紙との接着力の時間依存性を例示するグラフである。横軸は、スタック開始からの経過時間を示す。縦軸は、接着力又は荷重を表す。時刻t=0はスタックする瞬間を表している。図2において右下がりのグラフG1は、ニスのべたつきによる接着力の挙動を表している。このグラフG1に関して、図2の縦軸は「接着力」を表す。 FIG. 2 is a graph illustrating the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper when the printed matter coated with the aqueous varnish is stacked. The horizontal axis indicates the elapsed time from the start of stacking. The vertical axis represents adhesive force or load. Time t = 0 represents the moment of stacking. In FIG. 2, a graph G1 that descends to the right represents the behavior of the adhesive force due to the stickiness of the varnish. Regarding this graph G1, the vertical axis of FIG. 2 represents “adhesive strength”.
 図2において、右上がりのグラフG2は、スタックによる荷重の増加挙動を示している。グラフG2に関して、図2の縦軸は「荷重」を表す。 In FIG. 2, a graph G2 that rises to the right shows an increasing behavior of the load due to the stack. Regarding the graph G2, the vertical axis in FIG. 2 represents “load”.
 図2において、太実線で示したグラフG3は、ニス表面と用紙裏面の間の接着力の挙動を示している。図2において、破線で示した水平のグラフG4は、許容接着力を表している。グラフG3及びG4に関して、図2の縦軸は「接着力」を表す。 In FIG. 2, a graph G3 indicated by a thick solid line shows the behavior of the adhesive force between the varnish surface and the paper back surface. In FIG. 2, a horizontal graph G4 indicated by a broken line represents an allowable adhesive force. Regarding the graphs G3 and G4, the vertical axis of FIG. 2 represents “adhesive strength”.
 ニス表面と用紙の間の接着力が、許容接着力以下であれば、ブロッキングは発生しない。ニス表面と用紙の間の接着力が、許容接着力を超えると、ブロッキングが発生する。 ブ ロ ッ キ ン グ Blocking does not occur if the adhesive strength between the varnish surface and the paper is less than the allowable adhesive strength. When the adhesive force between the varnish surface and the paper exceeds the allowable adhesive force, blocking occurs.
 図2に示すように、スタックする瞬間(t=0)のべたつきによる接着力が許容接着力より小さい場合、荷重増加速度が、ニスのべたつきによる接着力が減る速度と同じか、若しくは、ニスのべたつきによる接着力が減る速度よりも遅ければ、ブロッキングは発生しない。 As shown in FIG. 2, when the adhesive force due to stickiness at the moment of stacking (t = 0) is smaller than the allowable adhesive force, the load increasing speed is the same as the speed at which the adhesive force due to varnish stickiness decreases, or If the adhesive force due to stickiness is slower than the rate at which it decreases, blocking does not occur.
 荷重増加速度は、グラフG2の傾きの大きさによって表される。ニスのべたつきによる接着力が減る速度は、グラフG1の傾きの大きさによって表される。グラフG1は、右下がりのグラフであり、傾きとしてはマイナスの値となるが、傾きの大きさは傾きの絶対値によって表される。 The load increasing speed is represented by the magnitude of the slope of the graph G2. The speed at which the adhesive force due to the stickiness of the varnish decreases is represented by the magnitude of the slope of the graph G1. The graph G1 is a downward-sloping graph, and the slope has a negative value, but the magnitude of the slope is represented by the absolute value of the slope.
 図3は、水性ニスが塗布された印刷物を積み重ねる場合におけるスタック中のニス表面と用紙との接着力の時間依存性を示す他の例のグラフである。図3における横軸、縦軸、並びに各グラフG1、G2、G3及びG4の表記ルールは、図2と同様である。 FIG. 3 is a graph of another example showing the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case where the printed matter coated with the aqueous varnish is stacked. The notation rules of the horizontal axis, the vertical axis, and the graphs G1, G2, G3, and G4 in FIG. 3 are the same as those in FIG.
 図3に示すように、スタックする瞬間(t=0)のニスのべたつきによる接着力が許容接着力より小さい場合、荷重増加速度が、ニスのべたつきによる接着力が減る速度よりも速ければ、ある荷重に達した時点(t=t)で、ニス表面と用紙裏面の間の接着力が「許容接着力」を超えるため、ブロッキングが発生してしまう。 As shown in FIG. 3, when the adhesive force due to varnish sticking at the moment of stacking (t = 0) is smaller than the allowable adhesive force, the load increasing rate is faster than the rate at which the adhesive force due to varnish sticking decreases. When the load is reached (t = t A ), the adhesive force between the varnish surface and the back surface of the paper exceeds the “allowable adhesive force”, and thus blocking occurs.
 図4は、水性ニスが塗布された印刷物を積み重ねる場合におけるスタック中のニス表面と用紙との接着力の時間依存性を示す他の例のグラフである。図4における横軸、縦軸、並びに各グラフG1、G2、G3及びG4の表記ルールは、図2と同様である。 FIG. 4 is a graph of another example showing the time dependency of the adhesive force between the surface of the varnish in the stack and the paper in the case where the printed matter coated with the aqueous varnish is stacked. The notation rules of the horizontal axis, vertical axis, and graphs G1, G2, G3, and G4 in FIG. 4 are the same as those in FIG.
 図4に示すように、スタックする瞬間(t=0)において、ニス中の溶剤量が最初から許容できないほど多い場合は、ニスのべたつきによる接着力が大きくなってしまい、許容接着力を最初から超えてしまう。この場合、スタックの2枚目でブロッキングが発生する。 As shown in FIG. 4, when the amount of solvent in the varnish is unacceptably large from the beginning at the instant of stacking (t = 0), the adhesive force due to stickiness of the varnish increases, and the allowable adhesive force is increased from the beginning. It will exceed. In this case, blocking occurs on the second stack.
 図2~図4から把握されるとおり、用紙がスタックする瞬間(t=0)のニス中の溶剤量と、スタック速度との関係がある一定の条件を満たすようにすると、ニスのべたつきによる接着力が減る速度が荷重増加速度より速いという状況を作ることができ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制することができる。スタック速度は、単位時間あたりのスタック枚数である。スタック速度は、単位時間あたりに、スタック束の最下層の用紙にかかる荷重の増える速度と相関する。 As can be seen from FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, if the condition that the relation between the amount of solvent in the varnish at the moment when the paper stacks (t = 0) and the stack speed are satisfied, the varnish sticks, It is possible to create a situation in which the speed at which the force decreases is faster than the load increase speed, and the occurrence of blocking can be suppressed. The stack speed is the number of stacks per unit time. The stack speed correlates with the speed at which the load applied to the lowermost sheet of the stack bundle increases per unit time.
 用紙がスタックする瞬間(t=0)のニス中の溶剤量は、印刷装置におけるニス塗布量及び/又はニス乾燥の条件などを制御することにより、適切な量に調整することができる。ここでは、図3に示した課題への対処手段について説明する。 The amount of solvent in the varnish at the moment of paper stacking (t = 0) can be adjusted to an appropriate amount by controlling the varnish application amount and / or varnish drying conditions in the printing apparatus. Here, a means for coping with the problem shown in FIG. 3 will be described.
 《第一実施形態の概要》
 第一実施形態に係るインクジェット印刷装置1は、印刷に用いる用紙の用紙種、水性ニスのニス種、画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び集積部で付与されるブロッキング抑止効果を持つパウダーのパウダー量のうち2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、特定のスタック速度Vにてブロッキングが発生すること無くスタックすることができるスタック許容枚数Xを決定する機能と、印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xを超える場合に、少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示する機能と、を有する。
<< Outline of First Embodiment >>
The ink jet printing apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment includes a sheet type of paper used for printing, a varnish type of water-based varnish, an ink amount of ink used for image formation, and a powder having a blocking deterrent effect applied in an accumulation portion. A function of determining the stack allowable number X that can be stacked without blocking at a specific stack speed V from a combination of two or more conditions of the powder amount, and the number of prints designated as the number of prints And a function of presenting at least one blocking suppression measure when Y exceeds the stack allowable number X.
 スタック速度Vは、単位時間あたりにスタックされる印刷物の枚数を示す。スタック速度は、インクジェット印刷装置1における給紙速度、及び/又は印刷速度の設定によって定まる。特定のスタック速度は、例えば、印刷モードによって設定されるスタック速度である。特定のスタック速度は、ユーザによって指定されてもよい。 The stack speed V indicates the number of printed products stacked per unit time. The stack speed is determined by the paper feed speed and / or the print speed setting in the inkjet printing apparatus 1. The specific stack speed is, for example, a stack speed set by the print mode. The specific stack speed may be specified by the user.
 スタック許容枚数Xは、スタック速度Vにて、印刷物を積み重ねる際に、ブロッキングの発生無く、スタックできる枚数の許容値である。スタック許容枚数Xは、スタック速度Vにてブロッキング非発生のスタックが可能なスタック可能枚数、若しくは、スタック速度Vでのブロッキング非発生のスタック上限枚数と理解してよい。 The stack allowable number X is an allowable value of the number of sheets that can be stacked without stacking when printing is stacked at the stack speed V. The stack allowable number X may be understood as a stackable number of sheets that can be stacked without blocking at the stack speed V, or an upper limit number of stacks without blocking at the stack speed V.
 スタック許容枚数Xは、印刷条件の組み合わせによって変化し得る。本実施形態では、用紙種、ニス種、インク量、及びパウダー量のうち2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、スタック許容枚数Xを決定する。 The stack allowable number X may vary depending on the combination of printing conditions. In this embodiment, the stack allowable number X is determined from a combination of two or more conditions among the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount.
 スタック許容枚数Xを決定する方法は、例えば、以下のように、予め用意した算出テーブルを用いて実施する。 The method of determining the allowable stack number X is performed using a calculation table prepared in advance as follows, for example.
 図5は、スタック許容枚数Xの算出に用いる算出テーブルの一例を示す図表である。図5に例示した算出テーブルは、用紙種、ニス種、インク量、及びパウダー量に関する複数の条件の組み合わせに対するスタック許容枚数Xの値が規定されているテーブルである。図5に示した算出テーブルは、第一の算出テーブルの一例である。なお、図5では、用紙種として4種類、ニス種として2種類、インク量として3種類、パウダー量として2種類の条件が例示されているが、図5の図表に示した各条件項目の種類分けは一例であって、これに限定するものではない。用紙種は媒体種の一例である。 FIG. 5 is a chart showing an example of a calculation table used for calculating the allowable stack number X. The calculation table illustrated in FIG. 5 is a table in which the value of the allowable stack number X for a combination of a plurality of conditions regarding the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount is defined. The calculation table shown in FIG. 5 is an example of a first calculation table. In FIG. 5, four types of paper types, two types of varnish types, three types of ink amounts, and two types of powder amounts are illustrated, but the types of the condition items shown in the chart of FIG. The division is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The paper type is an example of a medium type.
 「坪量」は、単位面積あたりの用紙の質量であり、一般的には、1平方メートルあたりのグラム数「g/m」の単位で表される。「g/m」は「GSM (grams per square meter)」と表記される場合がある。「坪量大」と「坪量小」の表記は、坪量の相対的な大小関係を表している。 “Basis weight” is the mass of paper per unit area, and is generally expressed in units of “g / m 2 ” grams per square meter. “G / m 2 ” may be expressed as “GSM (grams per square meter)”. The notations “large basis weight” and “small basis weight” indicate the relative size relationship of the basis weight.
 インク量は、画像を印刷するために用紙に付与されるインクの量を示している。インク量は、印刷対象の画像情報から計算によって推定することができる。インク量は、用紙に付与されるインクの総量で評価してもよいし、単位面積あたりのインクの量で評価してもよい。インク量の「大」、「中」、又は「小」の表記は、インク量の相対的な量的関係を表している。 The ink amount indicates the amount of ink applied to the paper for printing an image. The ink amount can be estimated by calculation from image information to be printed. The ink amount may be evaluated by the total amount of ink applied to the paper, or may be evaluated by the amount of ink per unit area. The notation “large”, “medium”, or “small” of the ink amount represents a relative quantitative relationship of the ink amount.
 パウダー量の条件に関して、図5に示した表中のパウダー「なし」とは、パウダーの噴霧量が「0」であることに相当する。また、パウダー「あり」とは、予め設定された規定量のパウダーの噴霧が実施されることを意味している。規定量は、ブロッキングの抑制効果が実効的に得られる噴霧量として定められる。パウダー「あり」は、パウダーの噴霧量が規定量であることに相当する。パウダー量の条件の概念には、パウダーの使用の有無が含まれる。パウダー量の条件に関しては、パウダーの「あり」と「なし」の2種類に限らず、パウダーの噴霧量の多寡によって多段階に分類してもよい。パウダー量は、単位時間あたりに噴霧するパウダーの噴霧量で評価してもよいし、用紙の単位面積あたりに付与するパウダーの噴霧量で評価してもよい。規定量のパウダーを噴霧することは、パウダーを所定の条件で付与することの一例である。パウダー「なし」は、パウダー量が「ゼロ」のの条件でパウダーを付与することに相当する。 Regarding the powder amount condition, “None” in the table shown in FIG. 5 corresponds to the powder spray amount being “0”. Moreover, the powder “present” means that a predetermined amount of powder is sprayed. The prescribed amount is determined as a spray amount that effectively obtains a blocking suppression effect. “Present” of the powder corresponds to the spray amount of the powder being a specified amount. The concept of the amount of powder includes whether or not powder is used. The condition of the amount of powder is not limited to two types of powder “Yes” and “No”, but may be classified into multiple stages depending on the amount of powder spray. The amount of powder may be evaluated by the amount of powder sprayed per unit time, or may be evaluated by the amount of powder sprayed per unit area of the paper. Spraying a prescribed amount of powder is an example of applying powder under predetermined conditions. “None” of powder corresponds to applying powder under the condition that the amount of powder is “zero”.
 図5に例示したような算出テーブルは、各種条件の組み合わせによる実験結果に基づいて作成することができる。すなわち、スタック速度の条件を含む各種条件の組み合わせによる実験を行い、各種条件の組み合わせに対して適切なX値の値を予め定めておくことができる。算出テーブルは、スタック速度の条件と対応づけられている。図5に例示の算出テーブルは、スタック速度Vに関する算出テーブルである。算出テーブルのデータは、メモリ等の記憶媒体に記憶しておき、必要に応じて読み出すことができるよう構成される。 The calculation table as illustrated in FIG. 5 can be created based on the experimental results based on combinations of various conditions. That is, it is possible to conduct an experiment using a combination of various conditions including the stack speed condition, and to predetermine an appropriate X value for the combination of various conditions. The calculation table is associated with the stack speed condition. The calculation table illustrated in FIG. 5 is a calculation table related to the stack speed V. The data of the calculation table is stored in a storage medium such as a memory and can be read out as necessary.
 図5に示したように、用紙種、ニス種、インク量、及びパウダー量に関する条件の各項目の組み合わせに対するX値を定めた算出テーブルのデータを予めインクジェット印刷装置に保持しておき、ユーザが指定する用紙種、ニス種、画像情報、及びパウダー量の条件のうち2以上の組み合わせから、算出テーブルを参照して、指定された条件に最も適した組み合わせを特定し、X値を決定する。インク量は、印刷対象の画像情報から計算によって推定することができる。 As shown in FIG. 5, the data of the calculation table that defines the X value for each combination of the items relating to the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount is stored in the inkjet printing apparatus in advance, and the user From the combination of two or more of the paper type, varnish type, image information, and powder amount conditions to be specified, the calculation table is referenced to identify the combination most suitable for the specified condition and determine the X value. The ink amount can be estimated by calculation from image information to be printed.
 算出テーブル内に保持されたデータをそのまま読み出して利用してもよいし、算出テーブル内のデータを用いて、補外(外挿)の演算若しくは補間(内挿)の演算などによって、指定の条件の組み合わせに適したX値を算出してもよい。 The data stored in the calculation table may be read and used as it is, or the specified condition can be used by performing extrapolation (extrapolation) or interpolation (interpolation) using the data in the calculation table. An X value suitable for the combination may be calculated.
 ユーザが指定した印刷枚数が、スタック許容枚数以下である場合、つまりY≦Xであれば、ブロッキングの発生無く、スタック速度VにてY枚をスタックすることができるため、集積部において、単純にY枚の印刷物を積み重ねるスタック方法を採用し得る。設定されたスタック速度Vにて単純に印刷物を積み重ねて単一のスタック束を形成するスタック方法を「標準スタック方法」と呼ぶ。標準スタック方法は、第一のスタック方法の一例である。 If the number of prints specified by the user is less than or equal to the allowable number of stacks, that is, if Y ≦ X, it is possible to stack Y sheets at a stack speed V without blocking, so that the stacking unit simply A stacking method of stacking Y printed materials may be employed. A stack method in which printed products are simply stacked at a set stack speed V to form a single stack bundle is referred to as a “standard stack method”. The standard stack method is an example of a first stack method.
 実施形態に係るインクジェット印刷装置1は、Y≦Xである場合に、設定されたスタック速度Vで印刷を実行し、標準スタック方法により集積部80に用紙Pをスタックする。 The ink jet printing apparatus 1 according to the embodiment executes printing at a set stack speed V when Y ≦ X, and stacks the paper P on the stacking unit 80 by a standard stack method.
 その一方で、ユーザが指定した印刷枚数が、スタック許容枚数を超える場合、つまりY>Xである場合、標準スタック方法にてY枚をスタックするとブロッキングが発生し得る。そのため、インクジェット印刷装置1は、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する対応策を少なくとも1つユーザに提示する。指定された印刷枚数の印刷を実現でき、かつ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する対応策を「ブロッキング抑制策」という。ブロッキング抑制策は、標準スタック方法と異なるスタック動作となるスタック方法を実施するものになる。 On the other hand, if the number of prints specified by the user exceeds the allowable number of stacks, that is, if Y> X, blocking may occur when Y sheets are stacked by the standard stack method. Therefore, the inkjet printing apparatus 1 presents at least one countermeasure for suppressing the occurrence of blocking to the user. A countermeasure that can realize printing of the designated number of printed sheets and suppress the occurrence of blocking is referred to as a “blocking suppression measure”. The blocking suppression measure implements a stack method that results in a stack operation different from the standard stack method.
 図6は、インクジェット印刷装置の制御装置が実現する機能の一部を示したブロック図である。インクジェット印刷装置1は、印刷装置本体1Aと、制御装置100とを含む印刷システムである。印刷装置本体1Aは、図1で説明したインクジェット印刷装置1の機械構造体を指す。印刷装置本体1Aは、用紙Pの搬送部5、給紙部10、画像形成部40、ニス塗布部60及び集積部80を含む。 FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a part of functions realized by the control device of the inkjet printing apparatus. The inkjet printing apparatus 1 is a printing system that includes a printing apparatus main body 1 </ b> A and a control apparatus 100. The printing apparatus main body 1A indicates the mechanical structure of the inkjet printing apparatus 1 described in FIG. The printing apparatus main body 1 </ b> A includes a conveyance unit 5 for paper P, a paper feeding unit 10, an image forming unit 40, a varnish application unit 60, and a stacking unit 80.
 搬送部5は、給紙部10から集積部80に至るインクジェット印刷装置1の全体としての用紙Pの搬送経路を構成する搬送機構を指す。搬送部5は、図1に示したフィーダーボード12、給紙ドラム13、処理液塗布ドラム21、処理液乾燥ドラム31、画像形成ドラム41、第一チェーンデリバリー51、ニス塗布ドラム61、及び第二チェーンデリバリー71を含む。なお、図6では記載が省略されているが、印刷装置本体1Aは、図1に示した処理液塗布部20、処理液乾燥部30、インク乾燥部50、ニス後処理部70、及びパウダー噴霧部96を含む。 The transport unit 5 refers to a transport mechanism that forms a transport path of the paper P as a whole of the inkjet printing apparatus 1 from the paper feed unit 10 to the stacking unit 80. The conveyance unit 5 includes the feeder board 12, the feed drum 13, the processing liquid application drum 21, the processing liquid drying drum 31, the image forming drum 41, the first chain delivery 51, the varnish application drum 61, and the second illustrated in FIG. Includes chain delivery 71. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the printing apparatus main body 1A includes the processing liquid application unit 20, the processing liquid drying unit 30, the ink drying unit 50, the varnish post-processing unit 70, and the powder spray shown in FIG. Part 96 is included.
 制御装置100は、インクジェット印刷装置1の全体の動作を制御する。制御装置100は、コンピューターのハードウェア及びソフトウェアの組み合わせによって実現することができる。制御装置100は、1台又は複数台のコンピューターを用いて実現することが可能である。制御装置100は、スタック許容枚数決定部102と、算出テーブル記憶部104と、ブロッキング抑制策提示処理部106と、情報提示部108と、選択指示受付部110と、ブロッキング対策制御部112と、を備える。 The control device 100 controls the overall operation of the inkjet printing apparatus 1. The control device 100 can be realized by a combination of computer hardware and software. The control device 100 can be realized using one or a plurality of computers. The control device 100 includes a stack allowable number determination unit 102, a calculation table storage unit 104, a blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106, an information presentation unit 108, a selection instruction receiving unit 110, and a blocking countermeasure control unit 112. Prepare.
 スタック許容枚数決定部102は、印刷条件の情報を取得し、スタック許容枚数Xを決定する処理を行う。印刷条件の情報には、印刷に用いる用紙の用紙種、水性ニスのニス種、及びパウダー量の条件の情報が含まれる。また、印刷条件の情報には、印刷対象の画像情報、及び、印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数Yの情報が含まれてもよい。 The stack allowable number determination unit 102 performs processing for acquiring information on printing conditions and determining the stack allowable number X. The information on the printing conditions includes information on the paper type used for printing, the varnish type of the aqueous varnish, and the powder amount conditions. Further, the print condition information may include image information to be printed and information on the number of prints Y designated as the number of prints.
 印刷対象の画像情報は、例えば、印刷用のデジタル画像を示す画像データであってよい。画像データは、画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量を評価する情報として利用することができる。制御装置100は、印刷対象の画像データから画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量を算出する図示せぬインク量算出部を含む。インク量算出部にて算出されたインク量の情報はスタック許容枚数決定部102に提供される。或いはまた、スタック許容枚数決定部102がインク量算出部を備えていてもよい。 The image information to be printed may be, for example, image data indicating a digital image for printing. Image data can be used as information for evaluating the amount of ink used to form an image. The control device 100 includes an ink amount calculation unit (not shown) that calculates the ink amount of ink used for image formation from image data to be printed. Information on the ink amount calculated by the ink amount calculation unit is provided to the stack allowable number determination unit 102. Alternatively, the stack allowable number determination unit 102 may include an ink amount calculation unit.
 スタック許容枚数決定部102は、取得した印刷条件における用紙種、ニス種、インク量及びパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、特定のスタック速度Vにてブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能なスタック許容枚数Xを決定する。スタック許容枚数決定部102は、算出テーブル105を用いてスタック許容枚数Xを決定する。 The stack allowable number determination unit 102 stacks at a specific stack speed V without blocking from a combination of two or more conditions among the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount in the acquired printing conditions. The allowable stack number X is determined. The stack allowable number determination unit 102 determines the stack allowable number X using the calculation table 105.
 算出テーブル記憶部104は、算出テーブル105のデータを記憶しておく記憶装置である。算出テーブル105は、例えば、図5に例示した算出テーブルである。 The calculation table storage unit 104 is a storage device that stores data of the calculation table 105. The calculation table 105 is, for example, the calculation table illustrated in FIG.
 ブロッキング抑制策提示処理部106は、スタック許容枚数決定部102によって決定されたスタック許容枚数Xと、印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数Yとを比較して、印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xを超える場合に、少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示するための信号処理を行う。ブロッキング抑制策提示処理部106は、例えば、ブロッキング抑制策を表す表示用の信号を生成する信号処理を行う。ブロッキング抑制策提示処理部106が生成する信号には、音声信号、振動信号その他のユーザの知覚に刺激を与える信号が含まれてもよい。 The blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 compares the stack allowable number X determined by the stack allowable number determination unit 102 with the print number Y designated as the number of sheets to be printed, and the print number Y becomes the stack allowable number X. If so, signal processing to present at least one blocking suppression measure is performed. The blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 performs, for example, signal processing for generating a display signal representing a blocking suppression measure. The signal generated by the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 may include an audio signal, a vibration signal, and other signals that stimulate the user's perception.
 情報提示部108は、少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策をユーザに提示するための情報出力装置を含んで構成される。情報出力装置は、例えば、表示装置である。情報出力装置として、音声出力装置及び/又は振動発生装置を含んでもよい。 The information presentation unit 108 includes an information output device for presenting at least one blocking suppression measure to the user. The information output device is, for example, a display device. As the information output device, an audio output device and / or a vibration generator may be included.
 選択指示受付部110は、情報提示部108に提示される少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策の採否に関するユーザからの選択の指示の入力を受け付けるユーザインターフェースである。選択指示受付部110は、例えば、キーボード、マウス、タッチパネル、若しくは操作ボタン、又はこれらの適宜の組み合わせを含む。また、選択指示受付部110は、音声によってユーザの指示を入力する音声入力装置を含んでもよい。 The selection instruction receiving unit 110 is a user interface that receives an input of a selection instruction from the user regarding adoption of at least one blocking suppression measure presented to the information presentation unit 108. The selection instruction receiving unit 110 includes, for example, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, operation buttons, or an appropriate combination thereof. The selection instruction receiving unit 110 may include a voice input device that inputs a user instruction by voice.
 ユーザは、情報提示部108に提示されたブロッキング防止策の採否を判断して、選択指示受付部110からブロッキング抑制策の採否の指示を含む選択の指示を入力する。 The user determines whether or not the blocking prevention measure presented on the information presenting unit 108 is adopted, and inputs a selection instruction including an instruction on whether or not to adopt the blocking suppression measure from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
 情報提示部108にブロッキング抑制策が1つのみ提示される場合、ユーザは、提示されたブロッキング抑制策の採否の指示を選択指示受付部110から入力する。その一方、情報提示部108に複数のブロッキング抑制策の候補が提示される場合、ユーザは、複数の候補の中から採用するブロッキング抑制策を指定する指示を選択指示受付部110から入力する。採用するブロッキング抑制策を指定する指示は、指定以外のブロッキング抑制策を採用しないことを示す指示を含んでいる。また、ユーザは、情報提示部108に提示された複数のブロッキング抑制策の候補のいずれも採用しない旨の指示を選択指示受付部110から入力することができる。選択指示受付部110から入力された指示は、ブロッキング対策制御部112に送られる。 When only one blocking suppression measure is presented to the information presenting unit 108, the user inputs an instruction to accept or reject the presented blocking suppression measure from the selection instruction receiving unit 110. On the other hand, when a plurality of blocking suppression measure candidates are presented to the information presentation unit 108, the user inputs an instruction for specifying a blocking suppression measure to be adopted from among the plurality of candidates from the selection instruction receiving unit 110. The instruction that specifies the blocking suppression measure to be adopted includes an instruction that indicates that a blocking suppression measure other than the specification is not adopted. In addition, the user can input an instruction to the effect that none of the plurality of blocking suppression measure candidates presented on the information presentation unit 108 is adopted from the selection instruction receiving unit 110. The instruction input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110 is sent to the blocking countermeasure control unit 112.
 ブロッキング対策制御部112は、選択指示受付部110から入力された指示に従い、ブロッキング抑制策の実行を制御する。ブロッキング対策制御部112は、印刷装置本体1Aの動作を制御し、スタック動作を制御する。例えば、ブロッキング対策制御部112は、集積部80におけるスタック方法を変更する制御を行う。また、ブロッキング対策制御部112は、搬送部5による用紙の搬送速度の変更、又は、給紙部10からの給紙速度の変更を含む制御を行ってもよい。或いはまた、ブロッキング対策制御部112は、搬送部5、給紙部10、画像形成部40、ニス塗布部60及び集積部80を含む印刷装置本体1Aの全体の印刷動作の制御を行ってもよい。ブロッキング対策制御部112は、制御部の一例である。 The blocking countermeasure control unit 112 controls the execution of the blocking suppression policy in accordance with the instruction input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110. The blocking countermeasure control unit 112 controls the operation of the printing apparatus main body 1A and controls the stack operation. For example, the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 performs control to change the stack method in the stacking unit 80. Further, the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 may perform control including a change in the sheet conveyance speed by the conveyance unit 5 or a change in the sheet feeding speed from the sheet feeding unit 10. Alternatively, the blocking countermeasure control unit 112 may control the entire printing operation of the printing apparatus main body 1 </ b> A including the conveyance unit 5, the paper feeding unit 10, the image forming unit 40, the varnish application unit 60, and the stacking unit 80. . The blocking countermeasure control unit 112 is an example of a control unit.
 インクジェット印刷装置1は、情報提示部108に提示され得るブロッキング抑制策の実施に必要な装置構成を予め具備していてもよいし、印刷装置本体1Aは、ブロッキング抑制策の実施に際して、装置構成についての変更が加えられてもよい。ブロッキング抑制策の実施に必要な装置構成の変更として、例えば、集積部80における集積装置の一部又は全部の交換、集積装置の追加、若しくは、付属ユニットの装着又は取り外しなどがあり得る。制御装置100は印刷制御装置の一例である。 The inkjet printing apparatus 1 may have a device configuration necessary for implementing a blocking suppression measure that can be presented to the information presenting unit 108 in advance. Changes may be made. The change in the device configuration necessary for implementing the blocking suppression measure may be, for example, replacement of a part or all of the stacking device in the stacking unit 80, addition of the stacking device, or attachment or removal of an accessory unit. The control device 100 is an example of a print control device.
 図7は、制御装置100における処理の例を示すフローチャートである。図7のフローチャートは、スタック方法を決定する処理の手順を示している。 FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the control device 100. The flowchart of FIG. 7 shows a procedure of processing for determining a stack method.
 ステップS101において、制御装置100は、印刷に用いる用紙種、ニス種、インク量及びパウダー量のうち、少なくとも2つの情報を取得する。これらの条件について重要度の高い順に並べると、ニス種、パウダー量、インク量、用紙種の順であると考えられる。したがって、制御装置100が取得する情報には、少なくともニス種の情報が含まれることが好ましい。また、制御装置100が取得する情報には、ニス種の情報に加えて、パウダー量の情報が含まれることが更に好ましい。本実施形態では、用紙種、ニス種、インク量及びパウダー量の各条件の情報を取得する。ステップS101において、これら複数の条件に関する情報は、同時に取得してもよいし、時間差を有して取得してもよい。ステップS101は、情報取得工程の一例である。 In step S101, the control device 100 acquires at least two pieces of information among the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount used for printing. When these conditions are arranged in descending order of importance, it is considered that the order is varnish type, powder amount, ink amount, and paper type. Therefore, the information acquired by the control device 100 preferably includes at least varnish type information. Moreover, it is more preferable that the information acquired by the control device 100 includes powder amount information in addition to the varnish type information. In this embodiment, information on each condition of paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount is acquired. In step S101, the information regarding the plurality of conditions may be acquired at the same time or may be acquired with a time difference. Step S101 is an example of an information acquisition process.
 ステップS102において、制御装置100は、スタック速度Vの情報を取得する。スタック速度Vは、予め設定された固定の値であってもよいし、ユーザが適宜設定した値であってもよい。 In step S102, the control device 100 acquires information on the stack speed V. The stack speed V may be a fixed value set in advance or may be a value appropriately set by the user.
 ステップS103において、制御装置100は、スタック許容枚数Xを決定する。ステップS103の処理は、スタック許容枚数決定部102によって行われる。ステップS103は、スタック許容枚数決定工程の一例である。 In step S103, the control device 100 determines the stack allowable number X. The processing in step S103 is performed by the stack allowable number determination unit 102. Step S103 is an example of a stack allowable number determination process.
 ステップS104において、制御装置100は、印刷枚数Yの情報を取得する。なお、ステップS104は、ステップS103よりも前に実施されてもよく、ステップS101、ステップS102及びステップS104の実施順番は図7に示した例に限らない。 In step S104, the control device 100 acquires information on the number of printed sheets Y. Note that step S104 may be performed before step S103, and the execution order of step S101, step S102, and step S104 is not limited to the example shown in FIG.
 ステップS105において、制御装置100は、印刷枚数Yとスタック許容枚数Xとを比較して、Y>Xを満たすか否かを判定する。制御装置100は、ステップS105の判定工程にて、Y≦Xであると判定した場合、ステップS110に移行する。 In step S105, the control device 100 compares the print number Y with the stack allowable number X, and determines whether or not Y> X is satisfied. When determining that Y ≦ X in the determination step of step S105, the control device 100 proceeds to step S110.
 ステップS110において、制御装置100は、集積部80のスタック方法を標準スタック方法に決定する。 In step S110, the control device 100 determines the stacking method of the stacking unit 80 as the standard stacking method.
 その一方、ステップS105の判定工程にて、制御装置100がY>Xであると判定した場合は、ステップS106に移行する。 On the other hand, when the control device 100 determines that Y> X in the determination step of step S105, the process proceeds to step S106.
 ステップS106において、制御装置100は、情報提示部108に少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示する。ステップS106は情報提示工程の一例である。制御装置100のブロッキング抑制策提示処理部106は、ステップS104~ステップS106の処理を行う。 In step S106, the control device 100 presents at least one blocking suppression measure to the information presentation unit 108. Step S106 is an example of an information presentation process. The blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 of the control device 100 performs the processing from step S104 to step S106.
 ステップS107において、制御装置100は、ユーザからの選択指示を受け付ける。制御装置100は、情報提示部108に提示された少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策の採否を選択する指示の入力を受け付ける。ユーザは、選択指示受付部110から選択指示を入力することができる。 In step S107, the control device 100 accepts a selection instruction from the user. The control device 100 receives an input of an instruction for selecting whether to adopt at least one blocking suppression measure presented to the information presenting unit 108. The user can input a selection instruction from the selection instruction receiving unit 110.
 ステップS108において、制御装置100は、選択指示受付部110からの選択指示の入力の有無を判定する。制御装置100は、選択指示受付部110からの選択指示の入力がなければ、ステップS107に戻って、指示の入力を待つ。 In step S108, the control device 100 determines whether or not a selection instruction is input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110. If there is no input of the selection instruction from selection instruction receiving unit 110, control device 100 returns to step S107 and waits for the input of the instruction.
 ステップS108において、制御装置100は、選択指示受付部110からの選択指示の入力があったと判定した場合、ステップS109に移行する。 In step S108, when the control device 100 determines that a selection instruction is input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110, the control apparatus 100 proceeds to step S109.
 ステップS109において、制御装置100は、ユーザによって入力された選択指示がブロッキング抑制策を選択したものであるか否かを判定する。制御装置100は、ステップS109の判定処理にて、ユーザがブロッキング抑制策を選択する指示を入力したと判定した場合、ステップS111に移行する。 In step S109, the control device 100 determines whether or not the selection instruction input by the user has selected a blocking suppression measure. When the control device 100 determines in the determination process of step S109 that the user has input an instruction to select a blocking suppression measure, the control device 100 proceeds to step S111.
 ステップS111において、制御装置100は、印刷物のスタック方法を、ユーザによって選択されたブロッキング抑制策のスタック動作を行うスタック方法(第二のスタック方法に相当)に決定する。 In step S111, the control device 100 determines the stacking method of the printed matter as a stacking method (corresponding to the second stacking method) for performing the stacking operation of the blocking suppression measure selected by the user.
 一方、ステップS109において、制御装置100は、ユーザがブロッキング抑制策を採用しない旨の指示を入力したと判定した場合、ステップS110に移行し、印刷物のスタック方法を、標準スタック方法に決定する。 On the other hand, if the control device 100 determines in step S109 that the user has input an instruction not to adopt the blocking suppression measure, the control device 100 proceeds to step S110 and determines the print stacking method to be the standard stacking method.
 ステップS110又はステップS111によってスタック方法が決定され、図7のフローチャートは終了する。 The stack method is determined in step S110 or step S111, and the flowchart of FIG.
 その後は、ステップS110又はステップS111によって決定されたスタック方法にしたがって印刷が実行され、集積部80に印刷物がスタックされる。 Thereafter, printing is performed according to the stacking method determined in step S110 or step S111, and the printed material is stacked on the stacking unit 80.
 図7に示したフローチャートに従う処理を含む制御方法は、印刷制御方法の一例である。 The control method including processing according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 7 is an example of a print control method.
 《ブロッキング抑制策の例1》
 以下、ブロッキング抑制策の例について説明する。
<< Example 1 of blocking prevention measures >>
Hereinafter, an example of a blocking suppression measure will be described.
 ブロッキング抑制策の例1は、印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xよりも大きい場合に、スタック速度Vで印刷を実行し、スタック枚数がX枚に到達したら、そのX枚積み上げた第一のスタック束とは別に、第二のスタック束を新たに積むという方策である。 Example 1 of the blocking suppression measure is that when the number of printed sheets Y is larger than the stack allowable number X, printing is performed at a stack speed V, and when the number of stacked sheets reaches X, the first stack bundle that is stacked X sheets Apart from that, it is a strategy to newly stack the second stack bundle.
 図8は、印刷枚数がY枚である場合に、X枚のスタック束ごとに、新たにスタック束を積む方策の概念図である。Y>Xにおいて、スタック許容枚数であるX枚ごとに、新たにスタック束を積む場合のスタック束の数は、YをXで除算した場合の商+1となる。ただし、YがXの倍数である場合に、スタック束の数は、YをXで除算した場合の商となる。つまり、YをXで除算した場合の商をN、余りをZとすると、Y=X×N+Zである。Nは1以上の整数である。Zは0以上の整数である。なお、N=1である場合、Zは1以上の整数となる。N>2である場合、Zは0以上の整数となり得る。 FIG. 8 is a conceptual diagram of a strategy for newly stacking a stack bundle for every X stack bundles when the number of printed sheets is Y. When Y> X, the number of stack bundles when stack stacks are newly stacked for every X stacks, which is the allowable number of stacks, is the quotient +1 when Y is divided by X. However, when Y is a multiple of X, the number of stack bundles is a quotient when Y is divided by X. In other words, if the quotient when Y is divided by X is N and the remainder is Z, Y = X × N + Z. N is an integer of 1 or more. Z is an integer of 0 or more. In addition, when N = 1, Z is an integer of 1 or more. Z can be an integer greater than or equal to 0 when N> 2.
 Z>1である場合、X枚のスタック束がN束と、Z枚のスタック束が1つの合計N+1束となる。その一方で、Z=0である場合、X枚のスタック束がN束となる。 When Z> 1, X stack bundles are N bundles, and Z stack bundles are one N + 1 bundle in total. On the other hand, when Z = 0, X stack bundles become N bundles.
 〈具体例1-1〉
 ブロッキング抑制策の例1に該当する具体例として、例えば、X枚のスタック束が積まれたら、そのX枚を積んだ第一のスタック束の上方に仕切り部材を挿入し、仕切り部材の上に、新たに第二のスタック束を積み、以後、同様に、X枚の単位で仕切り部材を挿入しながら、第三のスタック束、第四のスタック束、・・・を積んでいくという構成を採用し得る。
<Specific example 1-1>
As a specific example corresponding to the blocking suppression example 1, for example, when X stack bundles are stacked, a partition member is inserted above the first stack bundle loaded with X sheets, and the partition member is placed on the partition member. The second stack bundle is newly stacked, and thereafter, similarly, the third stack bundle, the fourth stack bundle, etc. are stacked while inserting the partition members in units of X. Can be adopted.
 図9は、ブロッキング抑制策の例1を実現する実施方法の具体例を概略的に示す図である。図9には、インクジェット印刷装置1の集積部80に採用される集積装置81Aの模式図が示されている。図9に示した集積装置81Aは、排紙台82を有し、X枚のスタック束ごとに、仕切り部材83を挿入し、仕切り部材83の上に新たなスタック束を積むことができる構成となっている。集積装置81Aを備えたインクジェット印刷装置1は、排紙台82の上にX枚の印刷物をスタックして、第一のスタック束Sb1を形成した後、この第一のスタック束Sb1の上方に、仕切り部材83を配置し、仕切り部材83の上に新たに第二のスタック束Sb2を積む。仕切り部材83は、第二のスタック束Sb2の重みが第一のスタック束Sb1に加わらないように、第一のスタック束Sb1の上方、かつ、第一のスタック束Sb1から離間した位置に配置される。その後同様に、X枚のスタック束の単位で、スタック束の上方に、仕切り部材83を配置して、新たに第三のスタック束を積む。この動作を繰り返して、N束、若しくはN+1束のスタック束を積む。 FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically illustrating a specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 1 of the blocking suppression measure. FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of an accumulation device 81A employed in the accumulation unit 80 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1. The stacking apparatus 81A shown in FIG. 9 has a sheet discharge table 82, and can insert a partition member 83 for every X stack bundles, and stack a new stack bundle on the partition member 83. It has become. The inkjet printing apparatus 1 including the stacking device 81A stacks X printed materials on the paper discharge tray 82 to form the first stack bundle Sb1, and then, above the first stack bundle Sb1, The partition member 83 is arranged, and the second stack bundle Sb2 is newly stacked on the partition member 83. The partition member 83 is disposed above the first stack bundle Sb1 and at a position away from the first stack bundle Sb1 so that the weight of the second stack bundle Sb2 is not applied to the first stack bundle Sb1. The Thereafter, similarly, in the unit of X stack bundles, a partition member 83 is disposed above the stack bundle, and a third stack bundle is newly stacked. This operation is repeated to stack N bundles or N + 1 bundles.
 集積装置81Aは、X枚のスタック束が積まれるごとに、仕切り部材83を自動的に挿入する機構を備えていることが好ましい。制御装置100は、仕切り部材83の挿入動作を制御する。 The accumulation device 81A preferably includes a mechanism for automatically inserting the partition member 83 every time X stacks are stacked. The control device 100 controls the insertion operation of the partition member 83.
 〈具体例1-2〉
 ブロッキング抑制策の例1に該当する他の具体例として、例えば、X枚を積んだ第一のスタック束を、スタック位置から別の退避位置に退避させ、新たに第二のスタック束を積み、以後、同様に、X枚の単位でスタック束を形成し、かつ、形成したスタック束を退避させる動作を繰り返して、第三のスタック束、第四のスタック束、・・・を積んでいくという構成を採用し得る。
<Specific Example 1-2>
As another specific example corresponding to the blocking suppression example 1, for example, the first stack bundle loaded with X sheets is retreated from the stack position to another retreat position, and the second stack bundle is newly loaded, Thereafter, similarly, the stack bundle is formed in units of X, and the operation of evacuating the formed stack bundle is repeated to load the third stack bundle, the fourth stack bundle, and so on. A configuration may be employed.
 図10は、ブロッキング抑制策の例1を実現する実施方法の他の具体例を概略的に示す図である。図10には、インクジェット印刷装置1の集積部80に採用される集積装置81Bの側面模式図が示されている。図10に示すように、第二チェーンデリバリー71の下方に、集積装置81Bが配置される。集積装置81Bは、排紙台の部分がベルトコンベア85を用いて構成されている。図10において、スタック位置は、ベルトコンベア85における最左のスタックエリアである。 FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing another specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 1 of the blocking suppression measure. FIG. 10 is a schematic side view of the stacking device 81B employed in the stacking unit 80 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1. As shown in FIG. 10, the accumulation device 81 </ b> B is disposed below the second chain delivery 71. In the stacking device 81 </ b> B, a discharge tray portion is configured using a belt conveyor 85. In FIG. 10, the stack position is the leftmost stack area in the belt conveyor 85.
 スタック位置で積まれたスタック束のスタック枚数がX枚に達したら、ベルトコンベア85のベルトを回転させて、第一のスタック束Sb1を別のスペースに退避させ、新たに第二のスタック束を積む。図10では、第一のスタック束Sb1、及び第二のスタック束Sb2をベルトコンベア85によって順次に、図10の右方向の退避位置に移動させた様子が示されている。図10では、スタック位置において第三のスタック束Sb3が積まれている。 When the number of stacks of the stack bundles stacked at the stack position reaches X, the belt of the belt conveyor 85 is rotated, the first stack bundle Sb1 is retreated to another space, and the second stack bundle is newly added. Pile up. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the first stack bundle Sb1 and the second stack bundle Sb2 are sequentially moved by the belt conveyor 85 to the retreat position in the right direction in FIG. In FIG. 10, the third stack bundle Sb3 is stacked at the stack position.
 図10のベルトコンベア85は、スタック位置を含めて3つのスタック束Sb1~Sb3のそれぞれをベルトコンベア上の異なる位置に載置し得るベルト長を有している。ベルトコンベア85のベルト長は、図10の例に限らない。また、複数のベルトコンベアを組み合わせ使用する形態も可能である。制御装置100は、スタック枚数をカウントして、ベルトコンベア85の駆動を制御する。ベルトコンベア85は、スタック束退避機構の一例である。 The belt conveyor 85 in FIG. 10 has a belt length that allows each of the three stack bundles Sb1 to Sb3 including the stack position to be placed at different positions on the belt conveyor. The belt length of the belt conveyor 85 is not limited to the example of FIG. Moreover, the form which uses combining a some belt conveyor is also possible. The control device 100 controls the driving of the belt conveyor 85 by counting the number of stacks. The belt conveyor 85 is an example of a stack bundle retracting mechanism.
 〈具体例1-3〉
 図11は、ブロッキング抑制策の例1を実現する実施方法の他の具体例を概略的に示す図である。図10で説明したベルトコンベア85を含む集積装置81Bに代えて、図11に示す回転式の排紙台を含む集積装置81Cを採用し得る。図11には、集積装置81Cの平面模式図が示されている。図11に示すように、第二チェーンデリバリー71の下方に、集積装置81Cが配置される。集積装置81Cは、排紙台及びスタック束退避機構として機能する回転台86を備える。回転台86は、複数のスタック束を載置し得る複数のスタックエリア86Aを有する。複数のスタックエリア86Aの各々は破線の矩形によって示されている。複数のスタックエリア86Aの各々は排紙台として機能する。
<Specific Example 1-3>
FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the first example of the blocking suppression measure. Instead of the stacking device 81B including the belt conveyor 85 described with reference to FIG. 10, a stacking device 81C including a rotary discharge tray illustrated in FIG. 11 may be employed. FIG. 11 is a schematic plan view of the accumulation device 81C. As shown in FIG. 11, an accumulation device 81 </ b> C is disposed below the second chain delivery 71. The stacking device 81C includes a turntable 86 that functions as a paper discharge table and a stack bundle retracting mechanism. The turntable 86 has a plurality of stack areas 86A on which a plurality of stack bundles can be placed. Each of the plurality of stack areas 86A is indicated by a dashed rectangle. Each of the plurality of stack areas 86A functions as a sheet discharge table.
 図11では、8つのスタックエリア86Aを有する回転台86が例示されているが、スタックエリア86Aの数は、図11の例に限定されない。スタックエリア86Aの数は、2以上の任意の数に設計し得る。 FIG. 11 illustrates the turntable 86 having eight stack areas 86A, but the number of stack areas 86A is not limited to the example of FIG. The number of stack areas 86A can be designed to be an arbitrary number of 2 or more.
 回転台86は、図示せぬ駆動装置を用いて回転させることができる。スタック位置SPのスタックエリア86Aに積まれたスタック束がX枚に達したら、回転台86を回転させて、スタック束が積まれたスタックエリア86Aの位置を移動させ、スタック束を退避させる。スタック位置SP以外のスタックエリア86Aの位置は、すべて退避位置に該当する。図11に示した集積装置81Cによれば、最大で8個のスタック束を積むことができる。 The turntable 86 can be rotated using a drive device (not shown). When the number of stack bundles stacked in the stack area 86A at the stack position SP reaches X, the turntable 86 is rotated, the position of the stack area 86A where the stack bundles are stacked is moved, and the stack bundle is retracted. All positions in the stack area 86A other than the stack position SP correspond to the retreat positions. According to the stacking device 81C shown in FIG. 11, a maximum of eight stack bundles can be stacked.
 《ブロッキング抑制策の例2》
 ブロッキング抑制策の例2は、印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xよりも大きい場合に、スタック速度Vで印刷を実行して、集積部80にスタック束を積み、スタック枚数がX枚に到達したら、一旦印刷を停止し、規定時間T経過した後に、印刷を再開して、同じスタック束にスタックを継続する方策である。規定時間Tは、スタック許容枚数Xを超える枚数のスタック束を積む場合に、ブロッキングの発生が無いスタックを実現できるように印刷を一時停止して待機する待機時間である。
<< Example 2 of blocking prevention measures >>
Example 2 of the blocking suppression measure is that when the number of printed sheets Y is larger than the stack allowable number X, printing is performed at the stacking speed V, the stack bundle is stacked on the stacking unit 80, and the stack number reaches X sheets. This is a measure for temporarily stopping printing and restarting printing after a predetermined time T has elapsed to continue stacking in the same stack bundle. The specified time T is a standby time in which printing is paused and waited so as to realize a stack without occurrence of blocking when stacks of stacks exceeding the stack allowable number X are stacked.
 図12は、スタック枚数がX枚に到達するごとに、印刷を停止して、規定時間T経過後に印刷を再開して、同じ(単一の)スタック束にスタックを継続する場合のイメージ図である。印刷枚数Yをスタック許容枚数Xで除算した場合の商をN、余りをZとすると、Y=X×N+Zである。したがって、例2の場合、図12に示すように、印刷を停止する回数は、YをXで除算した場合の商Nとなる。ただし、YがXの倍数である場合に、印刷を停止する回数は、YをXで除算した場合のN-1となる。 FIG. 12 is an image diagram in a case where printing is stopped every time the number of stacks reaches X, printing is resumed after a lapse of a specified time T, and stacking is continued in the same (single) stack bundle. . If the quotient when the number of printed sheets Y is divided by the stack allowable number X is N and the remainder is Z, Y = X × N + Z. Therefore, in the case of Example 2, as shown in FIG. 12, the number of times printing is stopped is the quotient N when Y is divided by X. However, when Y is a multiple of X, the number of times printing is stopped is N−1 when Y is divided by X.
 規定時間Tの経過を待つ理由は、X枚ごとに、印刷を停止して時間をおくことで、ニス膜のべたつきを低減し、ブロッキングを発生させることなく、(X×2)枚、(X×3)枚、(X×4)枚・・・の荷重に耐えられるようにするためである。 The reason for waiting for the elapse of the specified time T is to stop printing for every X sheets, and reduce the stickiness of the varnish film without causing blocking, and (X × 2) sheets, (X This is to withstand the load of (× 3), (X × 4),.
 規定時間Tは、スタック許容枚数Xの場合と同様に、用紙種、ニス種、インク量、及びパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから決定される。規定時間Tを決定する方法は、例えば、以下のように、予め用意した算出テーブルを用いて実施する。 Specified time T is determined from a combination of two or more conditions among paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount, as in the case of stack allowable number X. The method for determining the prescribed time T is performed using a calculation table prepared in advance as follows, for example.
 図13は、規定時間Tの算出に用いる算出テーブルの一例を示す図表である。図13に例示した算出テーブルは、用紙種、ニス種、インク量、及びパウダー量に関する複数の条件の組み合わせに対するスタック許容枚数Xの値及び規定時間Tが規定されているテーブルである。図13に例示した算出テーブルは、図5に示した算出テーブルに、規定時間Tの値を追加したものとなっている。図13に例示の算出テーブルを用いることにより、スタック許容枚数X及び規定時間Tを算出することができる。図13に示した算出テーブルは、第二の算出テーブルの一例である。 FIG. 13 is a chart showing an example of a calculation table used for calculating the specified time T. The calculation table illustrated in FIG. 13 is a table in which the value of the stack allowable number X and the specified time T are specified for a combination of a plurality of conditions regarding the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount. The calculation table illustrated in FIG. 13 is obtained by adding the value of the specified time T to the calculation table illustrated in FIG. By using the calculation table illustrated in FIG. 13, the stack allowable number X and the specified time T can be calculated. The calculation table illustrated in FIG. 13 is an example of a second calculation table.
 なお、図13では、用紙種として4種類、ニス種として2種類、インク量として3種類、パウダー量として2種類の条件が例示されているが、図13の図表に示した各条件項目の種類分けは一例であって、これに限定するものではない。 In FIG. 13, four types of paper types, two types of varnish types, three types of ink amounts, and two types of powder amounts are illustrated, but the types of the condition items shown in the chart of FIG. The division is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
 図14は、ブロッキング抑制策の例2を実施するインクジェット印刷装置1が備える機能を示したブロック図である。図14において、図6に示した構成と同一又は類似の要素には同一の符号を付し、その説明は省略する。 FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating functions provided in the ink jet printing apparatus 1 that implements the blocking suppression example 2. 14, elements that are the same as or similar to those in the configuration shown in FIG. 6 are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
 制御装置100は、規定時間決定部103を備える。算出テーブル記憶部104には、算出テーブル105として、例えば、図13に示したような算出テーブルが記憶される。 The control device 100 includes a specified time determination unit 103. In the calculation table storage unit 104, for example, a calculation table as illustrated in FIG.
 規定時間決定部103は、取得した印刷条件における用紙種、ニス種、インク量及びパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、スタック許容枚数Xに到達したスタック束の上に特定のスタック速度Vにてブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることができる規定時間Tを決定する。規定時間決定部103は、図13に示したような算出テーブル105を用いて規定時間Tを決定する。 The specified time determination unit 103 selects a specific stack on the stack bundle that has reached the stack allowable number X from a combination of two or more conditions among the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, and powder amount in the acquired printing conditions. A prescribed time T that can be stacked without occurrence of blocking at a speed V is determined. The specified time determination unit 103 determines the specified time T using the calculation table 105 as shown in FIG.
 また、スタック許容枚数決定部102は、図13に示したような算出テーブル105を用いてスタック許容枚数Xを決定する。なお、スタック許容枚数決定部102と規定時間決定部103は、スタック許容枚数決定部102の機能と、規定時間決定部103の機能とを併せもつ、スタック許容枚数及び規定時間決定部114として構成されてもよい。 Further, the allowable stack number determining unit 102 determines the allowable stack number X using the calculation table 105 as shown in FIG. The allowable stack number determining unit 102 and the specified time determining unit 103 are configured as an allowable stack number and specified time determining unit 114 having both the function of the allowable stack number determining unit 102 and the function of the specified time determining unit 103. May be.
 ブロッキング抑制策提示処理部106は、ブロッキング抑制策を提示するにあたり、提示する情報に規定時間Tの情報を含めてもよい。 When presenting the blocking suppression measure, the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 may include information on the specified time T in the information to be presented.
 ブロッキング対策制御部112は、スタック許容枚数決定部102によって決定されたスタック許容枚数Xと、規定時間決定部103によって決定された規定時間Tと、に基づき、印刷の停止と再開を制御する。制御装置100は、集積部80におけるスタック枚数を管理して、X枚ごとに印刷を一旦停止させ、規定時間T経過後に、印刷を再開させる。 The blocking countermeasure control unit 112 controls the stop and restart of printing based on the allowable stack number X determined by the allowable stack number determining unit 102 and the specified time T determined by the specified time determining unit 103. The control device 100 manages the number of stacks in the stacking unit 80, temporarily stops printing for every X sheets, and resumes printing after the lapse of the specified time T.
 〈例1と例2の組み合わせ態様例〉
 ブロッキング抑制策の例1として説明した方策を適用し、印刷枚数Yに対して、スタック許容枚数Xごとに、新たなスタック束を積むと、スタック束の総数が3以上になる場合に、第二のスタック束のスタック枚数がX枚に到達した後、既に退避位置に退避させていた第一のスタック束の上に、第三以降のいずれかのスタック束を積み上げる構成を採用してもよい。ただし、退避させていた第一のスタック束の上に更に別のスタック束を積むには、第一のスタック束についてX枚のスタック終了から、規定時間Tが経過していることを条件とする。つまり、第一のスタック束についてのX枚のスタック終了から規定時間Tが経過した第一のスタック束の上に、第三以降のいずれかのスタック束を積むことができる。
<Combination example of Example 1 and Example 2>
When the measure described as the blocking suppression measure example 1 is applied and a new stack bundle is stacked for each stack allowable number X with respect to the print number Y, the number of stack bundles becomes 3 or more. A configuration may be adopted in which any of the third and subsequent stack bundles is stacked on the first stack bundle that has already been retracted to the retracted position after the number of stacks of the first stack bundle reaches X. However, in order to stack another stack bundle on the first stack bundle that has been evacuated, a specified time T has elapsed from the end of X stacks for the first stack bundle. . That is, any of the third and subsequent stack bundles can be stacked on the first stack bundle that has passed the specified time T from the end of the X stacks of the first stack bundle.
 例えば、第三のスタック束を積み始める時点で、第一のスタック束のスタック終了から規定時間Tが経過していれば、第一のスタック束の上に第三のスタック束を積む。一方、第三のスタック束を積み始める時点で、第一のスタック束のスタック終了から規定時間Tが経過していなければ、第三のスタック束は、第一及び第二のスタック束とは別に、新たに積む。そして、第四のスタック束を積み始める時点で第一のスタック束のスタック終了から規定時間Tが経過していれば、第一のスタック束の上に第四のスタック束を積む。以下同様にして、第二以降のスタック束についても、それぞれのスタック束のスタック終了後から規定時間Tが経過したスタック束の上に、スタック束を積み増しすることができる。 For example, if the specified time T has elapsed from the end of the stack of the first stack bundle at the time of starting to stack the third stack bundle, the third stack bundle is stacked on the first stack bundle. On the other hand, if the specified time T has not elapsed since the end of the stack of the first stack bundle at the start of stacking the third stack bundle, the third stack bundle is separated from the first and second stack bundles. , Pile up new. Then, if the specified time T has elapsed from the end of the stack of the first stack bundle at the time of starting to stack the fourth stack bundle, the fourth stack bundle is stacked on the first stack bundle. Similarly, for the second and subsequent stack bundles, the stack bundle can be stacked on the stack bundle after the lapse of the specified time T from the end of the stack of each stack bundle.
 第一のスタック束は、第一番目のスタック束に相当する。第二のスタック束は、第二番目のスタック束に相当する。第三のスタック束、又は第四のスタック束は、第三番目以降のスタック束に相当する。 The first stack bundle corresponds to the first stack bundle. The second stack bundle corresponds to the second stack bundle. The third stack bundle or the fourth stack bundle corresponds to the third and subsequent stack bundles.
 《ブロッキング抑制策の例3》
 ブロッキング抑制策の例3は、印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xよりも大きい場合に、スタック速度をVよりも低速のVまで遅くする方策である。Vは、ブロッキングの発生無くY枚以上のスタックが可能となるスタック速度である。
<< Example 3 of blocking prevention measures >>
Example 3 of the blocking suppression measure is a measure for reducing the stack speed to VA, which is lower than V, when the number of printed sheets Y is larger than the stack allowable number X. V A is a stack speed at which Y or more stacks are possible without blocking.
 変更後のスタック速度Vは、例えば、以下の式を用いて算出される。 The changed stack speed V A is calculated using, for example, the following equation.
 V=V×(X/Y)
 一例として、V=2000sphであり、X=500枚である場合に、Y=1000枚の印刷を行う場合は、V=2000×(500/1000)=1000sphとなる。「sph」は、1時間あたりのシート枚数を示す単位であり、シートパーアワーを意味する。
V A = V × (X / Y)
As an example, when V = 2000 sph and X = 500 sheets and Y = 1000 sheets are printed, V A = 2000 × (500/1000) = 1000 sph. “Sph” is a unit indicating the number of sheets per hour, and means sheet per hour.
 スタック速度を変更する手段の一例として、搬送部5による用紙の搬送速度を変更する形態があり得る。また、スタック速度を変更する手段の他の一例として、給紙部10における給紙時間間隔を変更する形態があり得る。具体的には、例えば、スタック速度Vを実現する給紙タイミングの時間間隔に対して、用紙1枚おき以上の一定の割合で給紙を間引き、給紙時間間隔を2倍以上の整数倍にする。 As an example of means for changing the stack speed, there may be a form of changing the paper conveyance speed by the conveyance unit 5. As another example of the means for changing the stack speed, there may be a form of changing the paper feed time interval in the paper feed unit 10. Specifically, for example, with respect to the time interval of the paper feed timing for realizing the stack speed V, the paper feed is thinned out at a constant rate of every other paper, and the paper feed time interval is made an integral multiple of twice or more. To do.
 図15は、ブロッキング抑制策の例3を実施するインクジェット印刷装置1が備える機能を示したブロック図である。図15において、図6に示した構成と同一又は類似の要素には同一の符号を付し、その説明は省略する。 FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating functions provided in the ink jet printing apparatus 1 that implements the third example of the blocking suppression measure. 15, elements that are the same as or similar to those shown in FIG. 6 are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
 制御装置100は、スタック速度決定部117と、スタック速度制御部118とを備える。スタック速度決定部117は、ブロッキングの発生が無く印刷枚数Y以上のスタックが可能となるスタック速度を決定する。スタック速度決定部117は、スタック許容枚数決定部102によって決定されたスタック許容枚数Xと、指定された印刷枚数Yと、設定されているスタック速度Vとに基づき、スタック速度Vを決定する。 The control device 100 includes a stack speed determination unit 117 and a stack speed control unit 118. The stack speed determining unit 117 determines a stack speed at which stacking can be performed for the number of printed sheets Y or more without blocking. The stack speed determining unit 117 determines the stack speed VA based on the allowable stack number X determined by the allowable stack number determining unit 102, the designated print number Y, and the set stack speed V.
 スタック速度制御部118は、スタック速度決定部117によって決定されたスタック速度Vに従い、印刷装置本体1Aのスタック速度を制御する。例えば、スタック速度制御部118は、スタック速度Vとなるよう搬送部5の用紙の搬送速度を制御する。 The stack speed control unit 118 controls the stack speed of the printing apparatus main body 1A according to the stack speed V A determined by the stack speed determination unit 117. For example, the stack speed control unit 118 controls the paper transport speed of the transport unit 5 so as to be the stack speed V A.
 または、スタック速度制御部118は、スタック速度Vとなるよう給紙部10から用紙の給紙時間間隔を制御する。給紙部10からの給紙時間間隔は、媒体を画像形成部に供給する媒体供給時間間隔の一例である。 Alternatively, the stack speed control unit 118 controls the paper feed time interval from the paper feed unit 10 so that the stack speed VA is reached. The paper supply time interval from the paper supply unit 10 is an example of a medium supply time interval for supplying a medium to the image forming unit.
 スタック速度決定部117とスタック速度制御部118は、ブロッキング対策制御部112の機能として含まれていてもよい。 The stack speed determination unit 117 and the stack speed control unit 118 may be included as functions of the blocking countermeasure control unit 112.
 《ブロッキング抑制策の例4》
 ブロッキング抑制策の例4は、印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xよりも大きい場合に、集積部80においてスタック許容枚数Xよりも少ない枚数の小部数に分割して小部数の単位で一定時間保持した後に、スタックすることにより、ブロッキングの発生が無くスタック可能な枚数をX枚からX枚に増加させ、スタック許容枚数Xを超えるスタック枚数のスタック束を形成する方策である。XはXよりも大きい整数である。ブロッキング抑制策の例4によれば、小部数に分割して一定時間保持した後にスタックすることによって、最終的にスタックするのにかかる時間を延長できる。このため、一度に形成できるスタック束の枚数がX枚よりも増える。
<< Example 4 of blocking prevention measures >>
In the fourth example of the blocking suppression measure, when the number of printed sheets Y is larger than the stack allowable number X, the stacking unit 80 divides the number of small copies into a smaller number of sheets than the stack allowable number X and holds the number of small copies for a certain time. later, by the stack, the without stackable number occurrence of blocking is increased to X a Like the X Like a measure to form a stack bundle of stacked sheets exceeding the stack allowable number X. X A is an integer greater than X. According to the blocking suppression example 4, the time required for the final stacking can be extended by stacking after being divided into small parts and held for a certain period of time. For this reason, the number of stack bundles that can be formed at one time is larger than X.
 〈具体例4-1〉
 図16は、ブロッキング抑制策の例4を実現する実施方法の具体例を概略的に示す図である。図16には、インクジェット印刷装置1の集積部80に採用される集積装置81Dの模式図が示されている。
<Specific Example 4-1>
FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically illustrating a specific example of an implementation method for realizing Example 4 of the blocking suppression measure. FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a stacking device 81D employed in the stacking unit 80 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1.
 集積装置81Dは、小部数の用紙の束を格納できる移動式の格納棚87を複数備えている。集積装置81Dは、いわゆるタワー式の駐車場のような機構原理が適用された図示せぬ移動機構により、複数の格納棚87を巡回式に移動させることができる構造となっている。図16では、8個の格納棚87を有する集積装置81Dの例が示されている。8個の格納棚87の各々にAからGの識別記号を付して示した。格納棚87の各々には、予め定められた規定枚数である小部数の印刷物の束を格納できる。ここでは、規定枚数をW枚とする。規定枚数Wは、2以上であり、かつ、スタック許容枚数Xよりも小さい整数である。 The stacking device 81D includes a plurality of mobile storage shelves 87 that can store a small number of sheets. The stacking device 81D has a structure in which a plurality of storage shelves 87 can be moved cyclically by a moving mechanism (not shown) to which a mechanism principle such as a so-called tower type parking lot is applied. In FIG. 16, an example of the stacking device 81D having eight storage shelves 87 is shown. Each of the eight storage shelves 87 is shown with an A to G identification symbol. Each of the storage shelves 87 can store a small number of printed material bundles that are a predetermined number of sheets. Here, the specified number is W. The specified number W is an integer that is two or more and smaller than the stack allowable number X.
 第二チェーンデリバリー71の下方には、印刷物を格納棚87へと導くガイド88が配置される。ガイド88は、第二チェーンデリバリー71の図示せぬグリッパーから開放された印刷物がガイド88に沿って滑り落ちるように、水平面に対して傾けた状態で配置される。この傾斜したガイド88の先に格納棚87の1つが配置される。ガイド88に沿って滑り落ちた印刷物は、ガイド88の先の格納棚87に格納される。格納棚87はガイド88の傾斜と概ね平行に傾けた状態で配置される。 Below the second chain delivery 71, a guide 88 for guiding the printed material to the storage shelf 87 is disposed. The guide 88 is disposed in an inclined state with respect to a horizontal plane so that a printed material released from a gripper (not shown) of the second chain delivery 71 slides along the guide 88. One of the storage shelves 87 is disposed at the tip of the inclined guide 88. The printed material that slides down along the guide 88 is stored in the storage shelf 87 ahead of the guide 88. The storage shelf 87 is arranged in a state of being inclined substantially parallel to the inclination of the guide 88.
 格納棚87がガイド88から印刷物を受け取る位置を「印刷物受取位置」と呼ぶ。図16において、印刷物受取位置にセットされている格納棚87は、識別記号Aの格納棚である。印刷物受取位置にセットされた格納棚87に印刷物が格納される。 The position where the storage shelf 87 receives the printed material from the guide 88 is referred to as a “printed material receiving position”. In FIG. 16, the storage shelf 87 set at the printed material receiving position is a storage shelf for the identification symbol A. The printed material is stored in the storage shelf 87 set at the printed material receiving position.
 印刷物受取位置にセットされた格納棚87に規定枚数の印刷物の束を格納した後、この格納棚87を図16の下方に格納棚1個分スライドさせ、新しい格納棚87を印刷物受取位置にセットして、以後、同様に規定枚数Wの印刷物の束を格納棚87に格納していく。「新しい格納棚」とは、印刷物が未格納であるカラ(空)の格納棚を意味する。 After storing a bundle of a predetermined number of printed materials in the storage shelf 87 set at the printed material receiving position, the storage shelf 87 is slid downward by one storage shelf in FIG. 16, and a new storage shelf 87 is set at the printed material receiving position. Thereafter, the bundle of the specified number W of printed materials is stored in the storage shelf 87 in the same manner. The “new storage shelf” means a empty (empty) storage shelf in which printed matter is not stored.
 図16において、識別記号Aの格納棚87に規定枚数Wの印刷物が格納されると、識別記号Aの格納棚87は、図16の下方に格納棚1個分スライドし、かつ、他の格納棚87も連動して各格納棚の位置がそれぞれ巡回式に移動することにより、印刷物受取位置に新しい格納棚として識別記号Bの格納棚87がセットされる。すなわち、図16に示した状態において、識別記号Aの格納棚87に規定枚数Wの印刷物が格納されると、識別記号Aの格納棚87は識別記号Hの格納棚87の位置に、識別記号Hの格納棚87は識別記号Gの格納棚87の位置に、識別記号Gの格納棚87は識別記号Fの格納棚87の位置に、識別記号Fの格納棚87は識別記号Eの格納棚87の位置に、識別記号Eの格納棚87は識別記号Dの格納棚87の位置に、・・・という具合にそれぞれ順次移動して、識別記号Bの格納棚87が印刷物受取位置にセットされる。 In FIG. 16, when a specified number W of printed matter is stored in the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A, the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A slides one storage shelf downward in FIG. The storage rack 87 is also linked to move the position of each storage shelf in a cyclic manner, whereby the storage shelf 87 with the identification symbol B is set as a new storage shelf at the printed material receiving position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 16, when a specified number W of printed matter is stored in the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A, the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A is placed at the position of the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol H. The storage shelf 87 for H is at the position of the storage shelf 87 for identification symbol G, the storage shelf 87 for identification symbol G is at the position of storage shelf 87 for identification symbol F, and the storage shelf 87 for identification symbol F is the storage shelf for identification symbol E. The storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol E is sequentially moved to the location for the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol D at the position 87, and so on, and the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol B is set at the printed material receiving position. The
 印刷物受取位置から、図16の縦方向に並んで配置される複数の格納棚87のうち最下の格納棚の位置が、格納棚87から印刷物の束を排紙台82へと移す「小部数保持解除位置」である。例えば、図16において、識別記号Fの格納棚87の位置が「小部数保持解除位置」に相当する。 The position of the lowermost storage shelf among the plurality of storage shelves 87 arranged side by side in the vertical direction in FIG. 16 from the printed material receiving position moves the bundle of printed materials from the storage shelf 87 to the paper discharge tray 82. "Release position". For example, in FIG. 16, the position of the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol F corresponds to the “small copy retention release position”.
 図17には、格納棚87に格納した印刷物の束を排紙台82にスタックする様子が模式的に示されている。図17において、識別記号Aの格納棚87は、小部数保持解除位置にセットされている。図16で説明した状態から印刷が更に継続され、識別記号Bの格納棚87及び識別記号Cの格納棚87のそれぞれに規定枚数の印刷物の束が格納されて、識別記号Dの格納棚87が印刷受取位置にセットされると、識別記号Aの格納棚87は、小部数保持解除位置にセットされる。 FIG. 17 schematically shows a stack of printed matter stored in the storage shelf 87 on the paper discharge tray 82. In FIG. 17, the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A is set at the small copy retention release position. Printing is further continued from the state described in FIG. 16, a bundle of a predetermined number of printed materials is stored in each of the storage rack 87 for the identification symbol B and the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol C, and the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol D is stored. When set at the print receiving position, the storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A is set at the small copy holding release position.
 小部数保持解除位置にセットされた格納棚87は、格納していた印刷物の束を排紙台82に移す処理を実施する。格納棚87から排紙台82に印刷物の束を移す手段は、例えば、格納棚87の底面を開口して、印刷物を落下させる構成としてよい。 The storage shelf 87 set at the small number holding release position performs a process of moving the stored bundle of printed materials to the paper discharge tray 82. The means for transferring a bundle of printed materials from the storage shelf 87 to the paper discharge tray 82 may be configured to open the bottom surface of the storage shelf 87 and drop the printed materials, for example.
 図18は、図16及び図17で説明した集積装置81Dの動作を模式的に示した説明図である。図18において、印刷物受取位置にセットされた識別記号Dの格納棚87に規定枚数の印刷物が格納されると、識別記号D、C及びBの格納棚87のそれぞれが、図18の下方に移動して、印刷物受取位置に識別記号Eの格納棚87がセットされる。識別記号Aの格納棚87は、図18に示さない別の個所へ移動する。 FIG. 18 is an explanatory view schematically showing the operation of the integrated device 81D described in FIGS. In FIG. 18, when a specified number of printed materials are stored in the storage rack 87 for the identification symbol D set at the printed material receiving position, the storage shelves 87 for the identification symbols D, C, and B move downward in FIG. Then, the storage shelf 87 of the identification symbol E is set at the printed material receiving position. The storage shelf 87 for the identification symbol A moves to another location not shown in FIG.
 小部数保持解除位置にセットされた格納棚87は、格納していた印刷物の束の保持を解除して、印刷物の束を排紙台82に移す。規定枚数の印刷物の束は、小部数に分割された媒体の束の一例である。規定枚数の印刷物の束は、格納棚87によって一定時間保持された後に、排紙台82にスタックされる。 The storage shelf 87 set at the small copy retention release position releases the stored bundle of printed materials, and moves the bundle of printed materials to the paper discharge tray 82. A bundle of a prescribed number of printed materials is an example of a bundle of media divided into small copies. A bundle of a predetermined number of printed materials is held on the storage shelf 87 for a certain period of time and then stacked on the paper discharge tray 82.
 〈具体例4-2〉
 図19は、ブロッキング抑制策の例4を実現する実施方法の他の具体例を概略的に示す図である。図19の(A)~(D)は、インクジェット印刷装置1の集積部80に採用される集積装置81Eの動作を模式的に表したイメージ図である。集積部80において印刷物を小部数に分割して一定時間保持する手段として、印刷物の側面の方向から、印刷物の束を拘束する位置にエアーを噴射し、噴射したエアーによって印刷物の束を拘束する形態を採用し得る。
<Specific example 4-2>
FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the blocking suppression measure example 4. FIG. 19A to 19D are image diagrams schematically showing the operation of the stacking device 81E employed in the stacking unit 80 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1. FIG. In the stacking unit 80, as a means for dividing the printed material into small copies and holding it for a certain period of time, air is ejected from the side of the printed material to the position where the bundle of printed materials is restrained, and the bundle of printed materials is restrained by the ejected air Can be adopted.
 集積装置81Eは、排紙台82と、図示せぬエアー噴射装置とを備える。図19中の符号120で示した矢印は、図示せぬエアー噴射装置から噴射されたエアーの流れを示している。エアーの噴射は、例えば、印刷物の4つの辺に対応した4つの側面のうち、対向する2つの側面の両側の方向から行われる。 The stacking device 81E includes a paper discharge tray 82 and an air injection device (not shown). An arrow indicated by reference numeral 120 in FIG. 19 indicates the flow of air injected from an air injection device (not shown). For example, air is ejected from both sides of two opposing side surfaces among the four side surfaces corresponding to the four sides of the printed matter.
 図19の(A)に示したように、規定枚数の小部数に分割された印刷物の束122は、エアー120の力によって空中に浮いた状態で拘束される。図19では、図示せぬエアー噴射装置から、重力方向の位置が異なる3段のエアー噴射を行い、各段のエアー噴射の高さ位置に対応する3個所の拘束位置の各々において印刷物の束122を拘束する例が示されているが、エアー噴射の段数、つまり、拘束位置の数は、図示の例に限らず、1以上であればよい。 As shown in FIG. 19A, the bundle 122 of printed matter divided into a predetermined number of small copies is restrained in a state of floating in the air by the force of air 120. In FIG. 19, three stages of air jets having different positions in the direction of gravity are performed from an air jet apparatus (not shown), and a bundle 122 of printed matter is obtained at each of the three restraint positions corresponding to the height positions of the air jets of each stage. However, the number of stages of air injection, that is, the number of restraining positions is not limited to the illustrated example, and may be one or more.
 図19の(B)は、図19の(A)の状態からエアー120の噴射を止めた場合の様子を示している。破線で示した矢印は、エアー120の噴射が停止していることを表している。図19の(A)の状態からエアー120の噴射を止めると、エアー120による拘束力が解除され、図19の(B)に示すように、印刷物の束122は、重力によって下方に移動する。 FIG. 19B shows a state in which the injection of the air 120 is stopped from the state of FIG. An arrow indicated by a broken line indicates that the injection of the air 120 is stopped. When the injection of the air 120 is stopped from the state of FIG. 19A, the restraining force by the air 120 is released, and as shown in FIG. 19B, the bundle 122 of printed matter moves downward by gravity.
 図19の(C)は、図19の(B)の状態からエアー120の噴射を再開した様子を示している。図19の(C)に示したように、エアー120の噴射を再開すると、重力によって下方に移動した印刷物の束122が再びエアー120によって拘束される。なお、図19の(B)において、最下のエアー噴射の拘束から解除された印刷物の束122は、排紙台82の上にスタックされる。 (C) in FIG. 19 shows a state where the injection of air 120 is resumed from the state of (B) in FIG. As shown in FIG. 19C, when the injection of the air 120 is resumed, the bundle 122 of printed matter that has moved downward due to gravity is restrained by the air 120 again. In FIG. 19B, the bundle of printed matter 122 released from the restriction of the lowest air jet is stacked on the paper discharge table 82.
 図19の(C)に示した3段のエアー噴射による3個所の拘束位置のうち、最も上の拘束位置に、新たな印刷物が拘束される。 The new printed matter is restrained at the uppermost restraint position among the three restraint positions by the three-stage air injection shown in FIG.
 図19の(A)から(C)で説明した動作を繰り返すことにより、図19の(D)に示すように、排紙台82の上に、X枚までブロッキング未発生の状態でスタックすることができる。標準スタック方法によってスタックするとX枚までしか積むことができないのに対し、図19に示した方法によれば、X枚を超えるXまでブロッキング発生無く積むことができる。 By repeating the operation described in FIG. 19 from (A) (C), as shown in (D) of FIG. 19, on the discharge tray 82 is stacked with a blocking non-occurrence until X A Like be able to. While it is not possible to gain only to X Like the stack by standard stack method, according to the method shown in FIG. 19, it is possible to gain without blocking occurs until X A in excess of X cards.
 なお、図19に示された集積装置81Eは、エアーの噴射を止めておくことにより、標準スタック方法によるスタックも可能である。例えば、印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xよりも少ない場合は、エアーを非噴射とすることにより、集積装置81Eの排紙台82に印刷物を標準スタック方法にてスタックすることができる。 Note that the stacking apparatus 81E shown in FIG. 19 can be stacked by the standard stacking method by stopping air injection. For example, when the number of printed sheets Y is smaller than the allowable number of stacked sheets X, prints can be stacked on the paper discharge table 82 of the stacking apparatus 81E by the standard stacking method by not ejecting air.
 〈具体例4-3〉
 図20は、ブロッキング抑制策の例4を実現する実施方法の他の具体例を概略的に示す図である。図20の(A)~(D)は、インクジェット印刷装置1における集積部80に採用される集積装置81Fの動作を模式的に表したイメージ図である。集積部80において印刷物を小部数に分割して一定時間保持する手段として、小部数の印刷物の束を保持する可動式の保持部材を用いてもよい。
<Specific Example 4-3>
FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically illustrating another specific example of the implementation method for realizing the blocking suppression measure example 4. FIG. 20A to 20D are image diagrams schematically showing the operation of the stacking device 81F employed in the stacking unit 80 in the ink jet printing apparatus 1. FIG. A movable holding member that holds a bundle of printed matter of a small number of copies may be used as means for dividing the printed matter into small copies and holding the printed matter for a certain period of time in the stacking unit 80.
 図20に示す集積装置81Fは、排紙台82と、可動式の複数の保持部材89とを備える。保持部材89は、図示せぬ駆動機構により、印刷物の束122を保持する保持位置と、印刷物の束122を非保持とする非保持位置とに移動可能である。非保持位置は、印刷物の束122の保持状態を解除する位置である。 20 includes a paper discharge tray 82 and a plurality of movable holding members 89. The stacking device 81F shown in FIG. The holding member 89 can be moved to a holding position for holding the printed product bundle 122 and a non-holding position for holding the printed product bundle 122 by a driving mechanism (not shown). The non-holding position is a position for releasing the holding state of the bundle 122 of printed matter.
 図20の(A)は、保持部材89が保持位置にセットされている状態を示している。図20の(A)に示したように、規定枚数の小部数に分割された印刷物の束122は、保持部材89によって保持される。図20では、重力方向の位置が異なる3段の保持部材89が配置され、各段の保持部材89の高さ位置に対応する3個所の拘束位置の各々において印刷物の束122を拘束する例が示されているが、保持部材89が配置される段数、つまり、拘束位置の数は、図示の例に限らず、1以上であればよい。 FIG. 20A shows a state in which the holding member 89 is set at the holding position. As shown in FIG. 20A, the bundle 122 of printed matter divided into a predetermined number of small copies is held by a holding member 89. FIG. 20 shows an example in which three stages of holding members 89 having different positions in the gravity direction are arranged, and the bundle 122 of printed matter is restrained at each of the three restraining positions corresponding to the height positions of the holding members 89 at each stage. Although shown, the number of steps where the holding member 89 is arranged, that is, the number of restraint positions is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be one or more.
 図20の(B)は、図20の(A)の状態から保持部材89を非保持位置に移動させて、印刷物の束122の保持状態を解除した場合の様子を示している。図20の(A)の状態から保持部材89を非保持位置に移動させると、図20の(B)に示すように、印刷物の束122は、重力によって下方に移動する。 20B shows a state in which the holding member 89 is moved to the non-holding position from the state of FIG. 20A to release the holding state of the bundle 122 of printed matter. When the holding member 89 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 20A to the non-holding position, as shown in FIG. 20B, the bundle 122 of printed matter moves downward due to gravity.
 図20の(C)は、図20の(B)の状態から保持部材89を保持位置に戻した様子を示している。図20の(C)に示したように、保持部材89を保持位置に戻すと、重力によって下方に移動した印刷物の束122が保持部材89によって保持される。なお、図20の(B)において、最下の保持部材89による保持が解除された印刷物の束122は、排紙台82の上にスタックされる。 20 (C) shows a state in which the holding member 89 is returned to the holding position from the state of FIG. 20 (B). As shown in FIG. 20C, when the holding member 89 is returned to the holding position, the printed material bundle 122 moved downward by gravity is held by the holding member 89. In FIG. 20B, the bundle of printed matter 122 released from being held by the lowermost holding member 89 is stacked on the paper discharge table 82.
 図20の(C)に示した3段の保持部材89による3個所の拘束位置のうち、最も上の拘束位置に、新たな印刷物が拘束される。 The new printed matter is restrained at the uppermost restraint position among the three restraint positions by the three-stage holding member 89 shown in FIG.
 図20の(A)から(C)で説明した動作を繰り返すことにより、図20の(D)に示すように、排紙台82の上に、X枚までブロッキング未発生の状態でスタックすることができる。標準スタック方法によってスタックするとX枚までしか積むことができないのに対し、図20に示した方法によれば、X枚を超えるXまでブロッキング発生無く積むことができる。 By repeating the operation described in FIG. 20 (A) from (C), as shown in (D) in FIG. 20, on the discharge tray 82 is stacked with a blocking non-occurrence until X A Like be able to. While it is not possible to gain only to X Like the stack by standard stack method, according to the method shown in FIG. 20, it is possible to gain without blocking occurs until X A in excess of X cards.
 なお、図20に示された集積装置81Fは、保持部材89を非保持位置に止めておくことにより、標準スタック方法によるスタックも可能である。例えば、印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xよりも少ない場合は、保持部材89を非保持位置に維持しておくことにより、集積装置81Fの排紙台82に印刷物を標準スタック方法にてスタックすることができる。 Note that the stacking apparatus 81F shown in FIG. 20 can be stacked by the standard stacking method by holding the holding member 89 in the non-holding position. For example, when the number of printed sheets Y is smaller than the allowable stacking number X, the printed material is stacked on the discharge tray 82 of the stacking apparatus 81F by the standard stacking method by maintaining the holding member 89 in the non-holding position. Can do.
 《ブロッキング抑制策の採否に連動した排紙先の変更について》
 実施形態に係るインクジェット印刷装置1は、情報提示部108に提示されるブロッキング抑制策の採否の選択指示の入力に連動して、印刷物の排紙先を自動的に切り換えるよう構成されてもよい。例えば、インクジェット印刷装置1は、第一のスタック方法(標準スタック方法)によって印刷物を集積する第一の排紙部と、ブロッキング抑制策に係る第二のスタック方法によって印刷物を集積する第二の排紙部と、を備え、印刷物の排紙経路が、印刷物を第一の排紙部へと導く第一の排紙経路と、印刷物を第二の排紙部へと導く第二の排紙経路とに分岐した構成を有し、ユーザが指定するブロッキング抑制策の採否の選択指示に応じて、排紙経路を切り換える制御を行ってもよい。
《Change of paper discharge destination in conjunction with adoption of blocking suppression measures》
The inkjet printing apparatus 1 according to the embodiment may be configured to automatically switch the discharge destination of the printed material in conjunction with an input of a selection instruction for selecting whether or not to adopt a blocking suppression measure presented to the information presentation unit 108. For example, the inkjet printing apparatus 1 includes a first paper discharge unit that collects printed materials by a first stacking method (standard stacking method), and a second discharge that collects printed materials by a second stacking method related to blocking prevention measures. A first discharge path for guiding the printed matter to the first discharge portion, and a second discharge path for guiding the printed matter to the second discharge portion. Control may be performed to switch the paper discharge path in response to an instruction to select whether or not to adopt a blocking suppression measure specified by the user.
 複数のブロッキング抑制策を実施し得る装置構成の場合、第二の排紙部及び第二の排紙経路に該当する排紙部及び排紙経路をそれぞれ複数備える形態となり得る。また、インクジェット印刷装置1は、ブロッキング抑制策の採否の選択指示に応じて、ブロッキング抑制策の実施に用いられる集積装置81A、81B、81C、81D、81E、81Fのいずれかのユニットを排紙位置にセットし、又は、排紙位置から退避位置に退避させることができる機構及び制御系を備えていてもよい。 In the case of an apparatus configuration that can implement a plurality of blocking suppression measures, a plurality of paper discharge units and paper discharge paths corresponding to the second paper discharge unit and the second paper discharge path can be provided. In addition, the inkjet printing apparatus 1 discharges any unit of the stacking devices 81A, 81B, 81C, 81D, 81E, and 81F used for the implementation of the blocking suppression measure in response to the instruction to select whether or not to adopt the blocking suppression measure. Or a control system that can be retracted from the paper discharge position to the retreat position.
 《インクジェット印刷装置の制御系》
 図21は、インクジェット印刷装置1の制御系の概略構成を示すブロック図である。制御装置100は、CPU(Central Processing Unit:中央処理装置)、RAM(Random Access Memory)、ROM(Read Only Memory)等を備える。制御装置100には、通信部201、操作部202、表示部203、及び記憶部204が接続されている。
<Control system of inkjet printing apparatus>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a control system of the inkjet printing apparatus 1. The control device 100 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a RAM (Random Access Memory), a ROM (Read Only Memory), and the like. A communication unit 201, an operation unit 202, a display unit 203, and a storage unit 204 are connected to the control device 100.
 通信部201は、図示せぬホストコンピューター等の外部機器との間でデータの送受信を行う。通信部201は、公知の通信インターフェースを含んで構成される。操作部202は、操作ボタン、キーボード、マウス、タッチパネル等の操作部材、若しくは音声入力装置、又はこれらの適宜の組み合わせ等からなる入力装置を含んで構成される。制御装置100は、操作部202から入力された情報に応じて各種処理を実行する。 The communication unit 201 transmits / receives data to / from an external device such as a host computer (not shown). The communication unit 201 includes a known communication interface. The operation unit 202 includes an operation device such as operation buttons, a keyboard, a mouse, and a touch panel, a voice input device, or an appropriate combination thereof. The control device 100 executes various processes according to information input from the operation unit 202.
 表示部203は、液晶パネル等の表示装置(ディスプレイ)を含んで構成される。表示部203は、制御装置100からの指令に応じて、インクジェット印刷装置の各種設定情報、又は異常情報などの各種情報を表示し得る。操作部202と表示部203とによってユーザインターフェースが構成される。ユーザは、表示部203の画面に表示される内容を見ながら操作部202を使って各種パラメータの設定及び各種情報の入力並びに編集が可能である。操作部202は、図6において説明した選択指示受付部110の役割を果たす。表示部203は、図6において説明した情報提示部108の役割を果たす。 The display unit 203 includes a display device (display) such as a liquid crystal panel. The display unit 203 can display various information such as various setting information or abnormality information of the ink jet printing apparatus in accordance with a command from the control device 100. The operation unit 202 and the display unit 203 constitute a user interface. The user can set various parameters and input and edit various information using the operation unit 202 while viewing the contents displayed on the screen of the display unit 203. The operation unit 202 serves as the selection instruction receiving unit 110 described with reference to FIG. The display unit 203 serves as the information presentation unit 108 described with reference to FIG.
 図21に示した記憶部204は、ハードディスク装置等の記憶デバイスを含んで構成される。制御装置100のCPUが実行するプログラムや、制御に必要な各種データは、ROM及び/又は記憶部204に格納される。 21 is configured to include a storage device such as a hard disk device. Programs executed by the CPU of the control device 100 and various data necessary for control are stored in the ROM and / or the storage unit 204.
 図22は、制御装置100が実現する機能のブロック図である。図22において、図1及び図6に示した要素と同一の要素には同一の符号を付し、その説明は省略する。 FIG. 22 is a block diagram of functions realized by the control device 100. In FIG. 22, the same elements as those shown in FIGS. 1 and 6 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
 図22に示すように、制御装置100は、搬送制御部210、給紙制御部211、処理液塗布制御部212、処理液乾燥制御部213、画像形成制御部214、インク乾燥制御部215、ニス塗布制御部216、ニス後処理制御部217、集積制御部218、パウダー噴霧制御部219、通信制御部220として機能する。 As shown in FIG. 22, the control device 100 includes a transport control unit 210, a paper feed control unit 211, a processing liquid application control unit 212, a processing liquid drying control unit 213, an image formation control unit 214, an ink drying control unit 215, a varnish. It functions as an application control unit 216, a varnish post-processing control unit 217, an accumulation control unit 218, a powder spray control unit 219, and a communication control unit 220.
 搬送制御部210は、搬送部5を制御して、用紙Pの搬送を制御する。搬送制御部210は、給紙部10から給紙される用紙Pが一定の速度で搬送されるように、各部に備えられた搬送手段の駆動を制御する。 The transport control unit 210 controls the transport unit 5 to control the transport of the paper P. The conveyance control unit 210 controls driving of the conveyance means provided in each unit so that the paper P fed from the paper feeding unit 10 is conveyed at a constant speed.
 給紙制御部211は、給紙部10を制御して、用紙Pの給紙を制御する。給紙制御部211は、給紙台にセットされた用紙Pが一定の給紙時間間隔で順次給紙されるように、給紙部10の構成要素の駆動を制御する。 The paper feed control unit 211 controls the paper feed unit 10 to control the paper feed of the paper P. The paper feed control unit 211 controls driving of the components of the paper feed unit 10 so that the paper P set on the paper feed table is sequentially fed at a constant paper feed time interval.
 処理液塗布制御部212は、処理液塗布部20を制御して、用紙Pへの処理液の塗布を制御する。処理液塗布制御部212は、搬送される用紙Pに所定の厚さで処理液が塗布されるように、処理液塗布部20の構成要素の駆動を制御する。 The treatment liquid application control unit 212 controls the treatment liquid application unit 20 to control application of the treatment liquid to the paper P. The treatment liquid application control unit 212 controls driving of the components of the treatment liquid application unit 20 so that the treatment liquid is applied to the conveyed paper P with a predetermined thickness.
 処理液乾燥制御部213は、処理液乾燥部30を制御して、用紙Pに塗布された処理液の乾燥を制御する。処理液乾燥制御部213は、用紙Pに塗布された処理液が乾燥するように、処理液乾燥部30の構成要素の駆動を制御する。 The processing liquid drying control unit 213 controls the processing liquid drying unit 30 to control the drying of the processing liquid applied to the paper P. The processing liquid drying control unit 213 controls driving of the components of the processing liquid drying unit 30 so that the processing liquid applied to the paper P is dried.
 画像形成制御部214は、画像形成部40を制御して、用紙Pに対する画像の形成を制御する。画像形成制御部214は、搬送される用紙Pに、画像が形成されるように、画像形成部40の構成要素の駆動を制御する。 The image formation control unit 214 controls the image forming unit 40 to control image formation on the paper P. The image forming control unit 214 controls driving of the components of the image forming unit 40 so that an image is formed on the conveyed paper P.
 インク乾燥制御部215は、インク乾燥部50を制御して、インクの乾燥を制御する。インク乾燥制御部215は、画像形成部40によって用紙Pに付与されたインクが乾燥するように、インク乾燥部50の構成要素の駆動を制御する。 The ink drying control unit 215 controls the ink drying unit 50 to control ink drying. The ink drying control unit 215 controls driving of the components of the ink drying unit 50 so that the ink applied to the paper P by the image forming unit 40 is dried.
 ニス塗布制御部216は、ニス塗布部60を制御して、画像形成後の用紙Pへのニスの塗布を制御する。ニスコートを実施する場合、ニス塗布制御部216は、用紙Pに一定の厚さでニスが塗布されるように、ニス塗布部60の構成要素の駆動を制御する。 The varnish application control unit 216 controls the varnish application unit 60 to control application of varnish to the paper P after image formation. When performing varnish coating, the varnish application control unit 216 controls driving of the components of the varnish application unit 60 so that the varnish is applied to the paper P with a certain thickness.
 ニス後処理制御部217は、ニス後処理部70を制御して、用紙Pに塗布されたニスの後処理を制御する。ニス後処理制御部217は、ニスコートに使用したニスの種類に応じた処理が行われるように、ニス後処理部70の構成要素の駆動を制御する。 The varnish post-processing control unit 217 controls the varnish post-processing unit 70 to control the varnish post-processing applied to the paper P. The varnish post-processing control unit 217 controls driving of the constituent elements of the varnish post-processing unit 70 so that processing corresponding to the type of varnish used for the varnish coating is performed.
 集積制御部218は、集積部80を制御して、用紙Pの集積を制御する。集積制御部218は、順次排紙される用紙Pが束状に集積されるように、集積部80の構成要素の駆動を制御する。なお、図9~図11及び図16~図20を用いて説明した各種の集積装置は、集積部80の構成要素となり得る。集積部80は、図9~図11及び図16~図20を用いて説明した各種の集積装置のうちの1つ、又は複数の組み合わせを含んで構成することができる。集積制御部218は、ブロッキング対策制御部112として機能し得る。 The accumulation control unit 218 controls the accumulation unit 80 to control the accumulation of the paper P. The stacking control unit 218 controls the driving of the components of the stacking unit 80 so that the sequentially discharged sheets P are stacked in a bundle. Note that the various integrated devices described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11 and FIGS. 16 to 20 can be components of the stacking unit 80. The stacking unit 80 can be configured to include one or a combination of various stacking devices described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11 and FIGS. 16 to 20. The accumulation control unit 218 can function as the blocking countermeasure control unit 112.
 また、制御装置100は、通信制御部220、画像処理部230、乾燥条件設定部234、ニス後処理条件設定部238、情報取得部240、及び表示制御部242として機能する。 In addition, the control device 100 functions as a communication control unit 220, an image processing unit 230, a drying condition setting unit 234, a varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238, an information acquisition unit 240, and a display control unit 242.
 通信制御部220は、図示せぬ外部機器との間の通信を制御する。 The communication control unit 220 controls communication with an external device (not shown).
 画像処理部230は、印刷対象として取得した画像の画像データを処理して、インクジェット印刷装置1の画像形成部40にて画像形成可能な画像形成用のデータ、すなわち、各インク色のドット配置データに変換する。画像処理部230は、色変換処理、濃度補正処理、及びハーフトーン処理などの各種の信号処理を行う。画像形成の際には、画像処理部230によって生成されたドット配置データに基づいて、画像形成部40におけるインクジェットヘッド43C、43M、43Y、43Kのインク吐出動作が制御される。 The image processing unit 230 processes image data of an image acquired as a printing target, and image forming data that can be formed by the image forming unit 40 of the inkjet printing apparatus 1, that is, dot arrangement data of each ink color Convert to The image processing unit 230 performs various signal processing such as color conversion processing, density correction processing, and halftone processing. At the time of image formation, ink ejection operations of the inkjet heads 43C, 43M, 43Y, and 43K in the image forming unit 40 are controlled based on the dot arrangement data generated by the image processing unit 230.
 乾燥条件設定部234は、インク乾燥部50にてインクを乾燥させる際の乾燥強度を規定するインク乾燥条件を設定する。 The drying condition setting unit 234 sets ink drying conditions that define the drying strength when the ink drying unit 50 dries the ink.
 インク乾燥条件は、画像の形成に用いるインクの種類、インク量、及び使用するニスの種類に応じて決定される。インク乾燥制御部215は、乾燥条件設定部234にて設定されたインク乾燥条件に基づきインク乾燥部50の動作を制御する。 The ink drying conditions are determined according to the type of ink used for image formation, the amount of ink, and the type of varnish used. The ink drying control unit 215 controls the operation of the ink drying unit 50 based on the ink drying conditions set by the drying condition setting unit 234.
 インクジェット印刷装置1は、第一温度検出部56を用いて検出された用紙Pの温度情報に基づき、インク乾燥部50がフィードバック制御される。すなわち、第一温度検出部56を用いて検出された用紙Pの温度情報は、乾燥条件設定部234へ送られる。乾燥条件設定部234は、第一温度検出部56を介して取得した用紙Pの温度情報に基づきインク乾燥条件を変更する。インク乾燥条件の設定には、インク乾燥条件の初期設定、及び予め設定されているインク乾燥条件の変更が含まれる。 In the ink jet printing apparatus 1, the ink drying unit 50 is feedback-controlled based on the temperature information of the paper P detected using the first temperature detection unit 56. That is, the temperature information of the paper P detected using the first temperature detection unit 56 is sent to the drying condition setting unit 234. The drying condition setting unit 234 changes the ink drying condition based on the temperature information of the paper P acquired through the first temperature detection unit 56. The setting of ink drying conditions includes initial setting of ink drying conditions and change of preset ink drying conditions.
 ニス後処理条件設定部238は、使用するニスの種類、及びインクの種類に基づき、ニス後処理条件を設定する。ニス後処理制御部217は、ニス後処理条件設定部238にて設定されたニス後処理条件に基づきニス後処理部70の動作を制御する。 The varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238 sets varnish post-processing conditions based on the type of varnish to be used and the type of ink. The varnish post-processing control unit 217 controls the operation of the varnish post-processing unit 70 based on the varnish post-processing conditions set by the varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238.
 インクジェット印刷装置1は、第二温度検出部94が用いて検出された用紙Pの温度情報に基づき、ニス後処理部70がフィードバック制御される。すなわち、第二温度検出部94を用いて検出された用紙Pの温度情報は、ニス後処理条件設定部238へ送られる。 In the inkjet printing apparatus 1, the varnish post-processing unit 70 is feedback-controlled based on the temperature information of the paper P detected by the second temperature detection unit 94. That is, the temperature information of the paper P detected using the second temperature detection unit 94 is sent to the varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238.
 ニス後処理条件設定部238は、第二温度検出部94を用いて検出された用紙Pの温度情報に基づきニス後処理条件を変更する。ニス後処理条件の設定には、ニス後処理条件の初期設定、及び予め設定されているニス後処理条件の変更が含まれる。 The varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238 changes the varnish post-processing condition based on the temperature information of the paper P detected using the second temperature detection unit 94. The setting of the varnish post-processing conditions includes an initial setting of the varnish post-processing conditions and a change of preset varnish post-processing conditions.
 情報取得部240は、制御装置100の外部から、又は制御装置100の内部の処理部などから、各種の情報を取り込むインターフェースである。情報取得部240は、操作部202から入力される情報を取得することができる。 The information acquisition unit 240 is an interface that captures various types of information from outside the control device 100 or from a processing unit inside the control device 100. The information acquisition unit 240 can acquire information input from the operation unit 202.
 スタック許容枚数決定部102は、情報取得部240を介して、印刷に使用する用紙の用紙種、ニス種、インク量、パウダー量、印刷枚数Y、及びスタック速度Vなどの情報を取得することができる。 The stack allowable number determination unit 102 can acquire information such as the paper type, varnish type, ink amount, powder amount, number of printed sheets Y, and stack speed V of the paper used for printing via the information acquisition unit 240. it can.
 算出テーブル記憶部104は、記憶部204の記憶領域の一部であってもよい。また、算出テーブル記憶部104は、RAMの記憶領域の一部であってもよい。 The calculation table storage unit 104 may be a part of the storage area of the storage unit 204. Further, the calculation table storage unit 104 may be a part of the storage area of the RAM.
 表示制御部242は、表示部203の表示内容を制御する。表示制御部242は、表示部203に表示させるための表示用信号を生成し、生成した表示用信号を表示部203に供給する。ブロッキング抑制策提示処理部106にて生成されたブロッキング抑制策の候補に関する情報は、表示制御部242を介して表示部203に表示される。 The display control unit 242 controls the display content of the display unit 203. The display control unit 242 generates a display signal to be displayed on the display unit 203 and supplies the generated display signal to the display unit 203. Information about the candidate for blocking suppression generated by the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106 is displayed on the display unit 203 via the display control unit 242.
 インクジェット印刷装置1は、ブロッキング抑制策の例1から例4として例示した各種の方策のうち、少なくともいずれか1つの方策を実現する装置構成であればよい。 The inkjet printing apparatus 1 may be an apparatus configuration that realizes at least one of the various measures illustrated as examples 1 to 4 of the blocking suppression measures.
 図6、図14、図15、図21及び図22に示した制御装置100のスタック許容枚数決定部102、規定時間決定部103、ブロッキング抑制策提示処理部106、ブロッキング対策制御部112、スタック速度決定部117、スタック速度制御部118、搬送制御部210、給紙制御部211、処理液塗布制御部212、処理液乾燥制御部213、画像形成制御部214、インク乾燥制御部215、ニス塗布制御部216、ニス後処理制御部217、集積制御部218、パウダー噴霧制御部219、通信制御部220、画像処理部230、乾燥条件設定部234、ニス後処理条件設定部238、情報取得部240、及び表示制御部242といった各種の処理を実行する処理部(processing unit)のハードウェア的な構造は、次に示すような各種のプロセッサ(processor)である。 6, 14, 15, 21, and 22, the allowable stack number determination unit 102, the specified time determination unit 103, the blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 106, the blocking countermeasure control unit 112, and the stack speed of the control device 100. Determination unit 117, stack speed control unit 118, transport control unit 210, paper feed control unit 211, processing liquid application control unit 212, processing liquid drying control unit 213, image formation control unit 214, ink drying control unit 215, varnish application control Unit 216, varnish post-processing control unit 217, accumulation control unit 218, powder spray control unit 219, communication control unit 220, image processing unit 230, drying condition setting unit 234, varnish post-processing condition setting unit 238, information acquisition unit 240, The hardware structure of the processing unit (processing unit) that executes various processes such as the display control unit 242 is as follows. Various processors.
 各種のプロセッサには、プログラムを実行して各種の処理部として機能する汎用的なプロセッサであるCPU(Central Processing Unit)、FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Array)などの製造後に回路構成を変更可能なプロセッサであるプログラマブルロジックデバイス(Programmable Logic Device:PLD)、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit)などの特定の処理を実行させるために専用に設計された回路構成を有するプロセッサである専用電気回路などが含まれる。プログラムは、ソフトウェアと同義である。 Various processors are processors that can change their circuit configuration after manufacturing, such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) that is a general-purpose processor that functions as various processing units by executing programs. Examples include a dedicated electric circuit that is a processor having a circuit configuration specifically designed to execute a specific process such as a programmable logic device (PLD) and an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit). A program is synonymous with software.
 1つの処理部は、これら各種のプロセッサのうちの1つで構成されていてもよいし、同種又は異種の2つ以上のプロセッサで構成されてもよい。例えば、1つの処理部は、複数のFPGA、或いは、CPUとFPGAの組み合わせによって構成されてもよい。また、複数の処理部を1つのプロセッサで構成してもよい。複数の処理部を1つのプロセッサで構成する例としては、第一に、クライアントやサーバなどのコンピューターに代表されるように、1つ以上のCPUとソフトウェアの組み合わせで1つのプロセッサを構成し、このプロセッサが複数の処理部として機能する形態がある。第二に、システムオンチップ(System On Chip:SoC)などに代表されるように、複数の処理部を含むシステム全体の機能を1つのIC(Integrated Circuit)チップで実現するプロセッサを使用する形態がある。このように、各種の処理部は、ハードウェア的な構造として、上記各種のプロセッサを1つ以上用いて構成される。 One processing unit may be configured by one of these various processors, or may be configured by two or more processors of the same type or different types. For example, one processing unit may be configured by a plurality of FPGAs or a combination of a CPU and an FPGA. Further, the plurality of processing units may be configured by one processor. As an example of configuring a plurality of processing units with one processor, first, as represented by a computer such as a client or server, one processor is configured with a combination of one or more CPUs and software. There is a form in which the processor functions as a plurality of processing units. Second, as represented by a system-on-chip (SoC), a form of using a processor that implements the functions of the entire system including a plurality of processing units with a single IC (integrated circuit) chip. is there. As described above, various processing units are configured using one or more of the various processors as a hardware structure.
 更に、これらの各種のプロセッサのハードウェア的な構造は、より具体的には、半導体素子などの回路素子を組み合わせた電気回路(circuitry)である。 Furthermore, the hardware structure of these various processors is more specifically an electric circuit (circuitry) in which circuit elements such as semiconductor elements are combined.
 《印刷プロセスの説明》
 図23は、ニスコートを実施する印刷の処理手順を示すフローチャートである。図23に示すフローチャートは、図7で説明したスタック方法の決定処理の後に開始される印刷処理の手順である。
<Description of printing process>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a printing processing procedure for performing varnish coating. The flowchart shown in FIG. 23 is a print processing procedure started after the stack method determination processing described with reference to FIG.
 印刷が開始されると、給紙部10から給紙が開始される(ステップS21:給紙工程)。給紙部10から給紙された用紙Pは、処理液塗布部20において、第一面に処理液が塗布される(ステップS22:処理液塗布工程)。処理液が塗布された用紙Pは、処理液乾燥部30にて第一面が加熱されて、処理液が加熱乾燥される(ステップS23:処理液乾燥工程)。処理液乾燥工程を経た用紙Pは、画像形成部40にて第一面にインクが打滴されて、画像が形成される(ステップS24:画像形成工程)。画像形成後の用紙Pは、インク乾燥部50にて画像表面が加熱されて、インクが加熱乾燥される(ステップS25:インク乾燥工程)。 When printing is started, paper supply is started from the paper supply unit 10 (step S21: paper supply process). The processing liquid is applied to the first surface of the paper P fed from the paper supply unit 10 in the processing liquid application unit 20 (step S22: processing liquid application process). The first surface of the paper P coated with the treatment liquid is heated by the treatment liquid drying unit 30 and the treatment liquid is heated and dried (step S23: treatment liquid drying step). The paper P that has undergone the treatment liquid drying step is ejected with ink on the first surface by the image forming unit 40 to form an image (step S24: image forming step). The paper P after image formation is heated by the ink drying unit 50 and the ink is heated and dried (step S25: ink drying step).
 インク乾燥工程を経た用紙Pは、ニス塗布部60にて画像表面にニスが塗布される(ステップS26:ニス塗布工程)。ニスが塗布された用紙Pは、ニス後処理部70にてニスの加熱乾燥処理を含むニスの後処理が行われる(ステップS27:ニス後処理工程)。後処理の内容は、使用するニスの種類に応じて切り替えられる。ニス後処理された用紙Pは、排紙位置で排紙され(ステップS28:排紙工程)、集積部80に集積される(ステップS29:集積工程)。 The paper P that has undergone the ink drying process is coated with a varnish on the image surface by the varnish coating unit 60 (step S26: varnish coating process). The paper P coated with varnish is subjected to varnish post-processing including heat drying of the varnish in the varnish post-processing section 70 (step S27: varnish post-processing step). The content of post-processing is switched according to the type of varnish used. The varnished post-processed paper P is discharged at the paper discharge position (step S28: paper discharge process) and stacked on the stacking unit 80 (step S29: stacking process).
 《インクジェットヘッドの吐出方式について》
 インクジェットヘッドのイジェクタは、液体を吐出するノズルと、ノズルに通じる圧力室と、圧力室内の液体に吐出エネルギーを与える吐出エネルギー発生素子と、を含んで構成される。イジェクタのノズルから液滴を吐出させる吐出方式に関して、吐出エネルギーを発生させる手段は、圧電素子に限らず、発熱素子や静電アクチュエータなど、様々な吐出エネルギー発生素子を適用し得る。例えば、発熱素子による液体の加熱による膜沸騰の圧力を利用して液滴を吐出させる方式を採用することができる。インクジェットヘッドの吐出方式に応じて、相応の吐出エネルギー発生素子が流路構造体に設けられる。
<Discharge method of inkjet head>
An ejector of an inkjet head includes a nozzle that discharges liquid, a pressure chamber that communicates with the nozzle, and a discharge energy generating element that applies discharge energy to the liquid in the pressure chamber. With respect to the ejection method for ejecting liquid droplets from the nozzle of the ejector, the means for generating the ejection energy is not limited to the piezoelectric element, and various ejection energy generating elements such as a heating element and an electrostatic actuator can be applied. For example, it is possible to employ a method in which droplets are ejected using the pressure of film boiling caused by heating of a liquid by a heating element. Corresponding ejection energy generating elements are provided in the flow path structure according to the ejection method of the inkjet head.
 《実施形態の利点》
 (1)上述した実施形態によれば、水性ニスを用いてニスコートを行う場合において、ユーザは集積部でのブロッキングの発生の有無を事前に把握することができる。
<< Advantages of the Embodiment >>
(1) According to the above-described embodiment, when performing varnish coating using an aqueous varnish, the user can grasp in advance whether or not blocking has occurred in the stacking unit.
 (2)ユーザは、指定した印刷枚数に応じて、ブロッキングの発生を防止し得る適切な対策を選択することができる。 (2) The user can select an appropriate measure that can prevent the occurrence of blocking according to the designated number of prints.
 (3)提示されたブロッキング抑制策が実施されることにより、ブロッキングの発生が防止される。 (3) Occurrence of blocking is prevented by implementing the proposed blocking suppression measures.
 《他の実施形態》
 図1では、印刷装置の一例としてインクジェット印刷装置を説明したが、本発明はインクジェット印刷装置に限らず、オフセット印刷装置、グラビア印刷装置、フレキソ印刷装置、スクリーン印刷装置、又は電子写真装置など、様々な印刷方式の印刷装置に適用することができる。
<< Other embodiments >>
In FIG. 1, an inkjet printing apparatus has been described as an example of a printing apparatus. However, the present invention is not limited to an inkjet printing apparatus, and may be various types such as an offset printing apparatus, a gravure printing apparatus, a flexographic printing apparatus, a screen printing apparatus, or an electrophotographic apparatus. The present invention can be applied to a printing apparatus using various printing methods.
 また、図1では、インラインでニスコートを行うインクジェット印刷装置を示したが、本発明はオンラインによるニスコートを行う印刷システムについても適用することができる。オンラインによるニスコートとは、印刷装置を用いた画像形成の処理と、ニスコート装置を用いたニスコートの処理とを一連の処理として連続的に行う形態である。オンラインによるニスコートは、例えば、ニスコートの機能を有していない印刷装置と、ニスコート装置とを組み合わせた印刷システムによって実施される。ニスコートの機能を有していない印刷装置は、画像形成後にニスコートを行わずに排紙する印刷装置である。ニスコート装置は、印刷装置と別体に構成されたニス塗布装置であってよい。ニスコートの機能を有していない印刷装置とニスコート装置とを直列的に接続した印刷システムは、オンラインによるニスコートを実施することができる。印刷システムは、印刷装置から排紙された画像形成後の用紙をニスコート装置の給紙部へと自動的に移送するためのベルトコンベアなどの用紙移送装置を含んでいてもよい。 1 shows an inkjet printing apparatus that performs varnish coating in-line, but the present invention can also be applied to a printing system that performs online varnish coating. Online varnishing is a form in which image forming processing using a printing device and varnishing processing using a varnishing device are continuously performed as a series of processing. Online varnishing is performed, for example, by a printing system that combines a printing device that does not have a varnishing function and a varnishing device. A printing apparatus that does not have a varnish coating function is a printing apparatus that discharges paper without performing varnish coating after image formation. The varnish coating apparatus may be a varnish coating apparatus configured separately from the printing apparatus. A printing system in which a printing apparatus that does not have a varnishing function and a varnishing apparatus are connected in series can perform online varnishing. The printing system may include a sheet transfer device such as a belt conveyor for automatically transferring the sheet after image formation discharged from the printing apparatus to the sheet feeding unit of the varnish coat apparatus.
 オンラインによるニスコートは、画像形成の処理とニスコートの処理とが連続して行われる点でインラインによるニスコートと共通するが、画像形成の処理とニスコートの処理とが別々の装置を用いて実施される点で相違する。そして、この相違により、ニスコートまでの時間間隔がインラインによるニスコートよりも長くなる傾向がある。 Online varnishing is the same as inline varnishing in that the image forming process and the varnishing process are performed continuously, but the image forming process and the varnishing process are performed using separate devices. Is different. Due to this difference, the time interval until the varnish coat tends to be longer than that of the in-line varnish coat.
 また、オンラインによるニスコートは、印刷装置から排紙される用紙が、そのままニスコート装置に給紙されるため、画像形成後の用紙がニスコート前に集積されない、という点でオフラインによるニスコートと相違する。 Also, the online varnish is different from the offline varnish in that the paper discharged from the printing apparatus is fed to the varnish apparatus as it is, and the sheets after image formation are not collected before the varnish.
 オンラインによるニスコートを行う印刷システムの場合、ニスコート装置の排紙部が集積部に相当する。オンラインによるニスコートを行う印刷システムは、本発明の印刷装置の一形態となり得る。 In the case of a printing system that performs online varnishing, the paper discharge unit of the varnishing device corresponds to the stacking unit. A printing system that performs online varnish coating can be an embodiment of the printing apparatus of the present invention.
 〈変形例1〉
 上記の実施形態では、シングルパス方式のインクジェット印刷装置を説明したが、例えば、短尺のインクジェットヘッドを往復走査させて画像を形成するマルチスキャン方式のインクジェット印刷装置についても本発明を適用することができる。
<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, the single-pass inkjet printing apparatus has been described. However, for example, the present invention can also be applied to a multi-scan inkjet printing apparatus that forms an image by reciprocating a short inkjet head. .
 〈変形例2〉
 上記の実施形態では、いわゆるロールコーターによって用紙にニスを塗布する構成としているが、ニス塗布部の構成は、これに限定されるものではない。例えば、チャンバーコーター等のニスコーターを用いて、用紙にニスを塗布する構成とすることもできる。
<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, the varnish is applied to the paper by a so-called roll coater, but the configuration of the varnish application portion is not limited to this. For example, a varnish may be applied to the paper using a varnish coater such as a chamber coater.
 〈変形例3〉
 上記の実施形態では、処理液を用いるインクジェット印刷装置を説明したが、処理液を使用しない印刷装置についても本発明を適用することができる。
<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, the inkjet printing apparatus using the treatment liquid has been described. However, the present invention can be applied to a printing apparatus that does not use the treatment liquid.
 〈変形例4〉
 情報提示部108に提示されるブロッキング抑制策の採否をユーザが判断して、選択指示受付部110から選択指示の入力を行う構成に加えて、インクジェット印刷装置1は、印刷枚数Yがスタック許容枚数Xを超える場合に自動的にブロッキング抑制策を実行する自動対策モードを備えていてもよい。インクジェット印刷装置1は、自動対策モードを有効にするか、無効にするかについて、ユーザが選択的に設定を行うことができるユーザインターフェースを備えた構成であることが好ましい。
<Modification 4>
In addition to the configuration in which the user determines whether or not to adopt the blocking suppression measure presented to the information presenting unit 108 and inputs the selection instruction from the selection instruction receiving unit 110, the inkjet printing apparatus 1 is configured such that the number of printed sheets Y is the stack allowable number. You may provide the automatic countermeasure mode which performs a blocking suppression measure automatically, when exceeding X. The inkjet printing apparatus 1 preferably has a configuration including a user interface that allows a user to selectively set whether to enable or disable the automatic countermeasure mode.
 自動対策モードが無効の設定となっている場合は、選択指示受付部110から選択指示の入力に従い、ブロッキング抑制策の実行が制御される。自動対策モードが有効の設定となっている場合は、選択指示受付部110からの選択指示の入力を待たずに、自動的にブロッキング抑制策が選択され、その自動選択されたブロッキング抑制策が実施されることになる。 When the automatic countermeasure mode is set to invalid, the execution of the blocking suppression measure is controlled according to the selection instruction input from the selection instruction receiving unit 110. When the automatic countermeasure mode is set to be effective, the blocking suppression measure is automatically selected without waiting for the input of the selection instruction from the selection instruction receiving unit 110, and the automatically selected blocking suppression measure is executed. Will be.
 《媒体について》
 「用紙」は、画像の形成に用いられる媒体の一例である。用紙という用語は、記録用紙、印刷用紙、印刷媒体、印字媒体、被印刷媒体、画像形成媒体、被画像形成媒体、受像媒体、被吐出媒体など様々な用語で呼ばれるもの総称として理解することができる。媒体の材質や形状等は、特に限定されず、シール用紙、樹脂シート、フィルム、布、不織布、その他材質や形状を問わず、様々なシート体を用いることができる。
<About the media>
“Paper” is an example of a medium used for image formation. The term “paper” can be understood as a generic term for various terms such as recording paper, printing paper, printing medium, printing medium, printing medium, image forming medium, image forming medium, image receiving medium, and discharged medium. . The material, shape, etc. of the medium are not particularly limited, and various sheet bodies can be used regardless of seal paper, resin sheet, film, cloth, nonwoven fabric, and other materials and shapes.
 用紙は、枚葉の媒体に限らず、連続紙などの連続媒体であってもよい。本発明の場合、集積部にスタックされる段階で、1枚ずつ分離された枚葉の媒体となっていればよく、連続媒体から規定のサイズにカットしてから給紙する形態、若しくは、画像形成後に規定のサイズにカットして排紙する形態などであってもよい。 The paper is not limited to a single sheet medium but may be a continuous medium such as continuous paper. In the case of the present invention, it suffices if the sheet medium is separated one by one at the stage of being stacked on the stacking unit, and is fed from a continuous medium after being cut to a specified size, or an image For example, the sheet may be cut into a predetermined size and discharged after formation.
 《用語について》
 「印刷装置」という用語は、印刷機、プリンタ、印字装置、画像記録装置、画像形成装置、画像出力装置、或いは、描画装置などの用語の概念を含む。また、「印刷装置」という用語は、複数の装置を組み合わせた印刷システムの概念を含む。
《Terminology》
The term “printing apparatus” includes the concept of terms such as a printing press, a printer, a printing apparatus, an image recording apparatus, an image forming apparatus, an image output apparatus, or a drawing apparatus. The term “printing apparatus” includes the concept of a printing system in which a plurality of apparatuses are combined.
 「画像」は広義に解釈するものとし、カラー画像、白黒画像、単一色画像、グラデーション画像、均一濃度(ベタ)画像なども含まれる。「画像」は、写真画像に限らず、図柄、文字、記号、線画、モザイクパターン、色の塗り分け模様、その他の各種パターン、若しくはこれらの適宜の組み合わせを含む包括的な用語として用いる。 “Image” is to be interpreted in a broad sense and includes color images, black and white images, single color images, gradation images, uniform density (solid) images, and the like. The “image” is not limited to a photographic image, but is used as a comprehensive term including a pattern, a character, a symbol, a line drawing, a mosaic pattern, a color painting pattern, other various patterns, or an appropriate combination thereof.
 「印刷」という用語は、画像の形成、画像の記録、印字、描画、及びプリントなどの用語の概念を含む。また、「印刷」という用語は、画像形成後に実施されるニスコートなどの後処理を含んだ概念の用語とし用いる場合がある。 The term “printing” includes the concept of terms such as image formation, image recording, printing, drawing, and printing. Further, the term “printing” may be used as a conceptual term including post-processing such as varnishing performed after image formation.
 本明細書における「直交」又は「垂直」という用語には、90°未満の角度、又は90°を超える角度をなして交差する態様のうち、実質的に90°の角度をなして交差する場合と同様の作用効果を発生させる態様が含まれる。本明細書における「平行」という用語には、厳密には非平行である態様のうち、平行である場合と概ね同様の作用効果が得られる実質的に平行とみなし得る態様が含まれる。 In the present specification, the term “orthogonal” or “perpendicular” refers to a case of intersecting at an angle of substantially 90 ° in an aspect of intersecting at an angle of less than 90 ° or greater than 90 °. The mode which produces the same operation effect as is included. In the present specification, the term “parallel” includes aspects that can be regarded as being substantially parallel among the aspects that are strictly non-parallel, and that can provide substantially the same operational effects as when parallel.
 《実施形態及び変形例等の組み合わせについて》
 上述の実施形態で説明した構成や変形例で説明した事項は、適宜組み合わせて用いることができ、また、一部の事項を置き換えることもできる。
<< Combination of Embodiments and Modifications >>
The matters described in the above-described embodiments and the modifications can be used in appropriate combinations, and some of the matters can be replaced.
 以上説明した本発明の実施形態は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲で、適宜構成要件を変更、追加、又は削除することが可能である。本発明は以上説明した実施形態に限定されるものではなく、本発明の技術的思想内で同等関連分野の通常の知識を有する者により、多くの変形が可能である。 In the embodiment of the present invention described above, the configuration requirements can be changed, added, or deleted as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and many modifications can be made by those having ordinary knowledge in the related fields within the technical idea of the present invention.
1 インクジェット印刷装置
1A 印刷装置本体
5 搬送部
10 給紙部
11 給紙装置
12 フィーダーボード
13 給紙ドラム
20 処理液塗布部
21 処理液塗布ドラム
22 処理液塗布装置
30 処理液乾燥部
31 処理液乾燥ドラム
32 第一用紙ガイド
33 ドライヤー
40 画像形成部
41 画像形成ドラム
42 用紙押さえローラー
43C、43M、43Y、43K インクジェットヘッド
44 スキャナー
50 インク乾燥部
51 第一チェーンデリバリー
52 第二用紙ガイド
53 第一加熱装置
56 第一温度検出部
60 ニス塗布部
61 ニス塗布ドラム
70 ニス後処理部
70A 第二加熱装置
71 第二チェーンデリバリー
72 第三用紙ガイド
80 集積部
81、81A、81B、81C、81D、81E、81F 集積装置
82 排紙台
83 仕切り部材
85 ベルトコンベア
86 回転台
86A スタックエリア
87 格納棚
88 ガイド
89 保持部材
90 ニスコーター
94 第二温度検出部
96 パウダー噴霧部
100 制御装置
102 スタック許容枚数決定部
103 規定時間決定部
104 算出テーブル記憶部
105 算出テーブル
106 ブロッキング抑制策提示処理部
108 情報提示部
110 選択指示受付部
112 ブロッキング対策制御部
114 規定時間決定部
117 スタック速度決定部
118 スタック速度制御部
120 エアー
122 印刷物の束
201 通信部
202 操作部
203 表示部
204 記憶部
210 搬送制御部
211 給紙制御部
212 処理液塗布制御部
213 処理液乾燥制御部
214 画像形成制御部
215 インク乾燥制御部
216 ニス塗布制御部
217 ニス後処理制御部
218 集積制御部
219 パウダー噴霧制御部
220 通信制御部
230 画像処理部
234 乾燥条件設定部
238 ニス後処理条件設定部
240 情報取得部
242 表示制御部
P 用紙
S21~S29 印刷処理のステップ
S101~S111 スタック方法決定処理のステップ
Sb1 第一のスタック束
Sb2 第二のスタック束
Sb3 第三のスタック束
SP スタック位置
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Inkjet printing apparatus 1A Printing apparatus main body 5 Conveyance part 10 Paper feed part 11 Paper feed apparatus 12 Feeder board 13 Paper feed drum 20 Process liquid application part 21 Process liquid application drum 22 Process liquid application apparatus 30 Process liquid drying part 31 Process liquid drying Drum 32 First paper guide 33 Dryer 40 Image forming unit 41 Image forming drum 42 Paper pressing rollers 43C, 43M, 43Y, 43K Inkjet head 44 Scanner 50 Ink drying unit 51 First chain delivery 52 Second paper guide 53 First heating device 56 First temperature detection unit 60 Varnish application unit 61 Varnish application drum 70 Varnish post-processing unit 70A Second heating device 71 Second chain delivery 72 Third paper guide 80 Accumulation unit 81, 81A, 81B, 81C, 81D, 81E, 81F Accumulator 82 Discharge stand 83 Partition member 8 5 Belt conveyor 86 Turntable 86A Stack area 87 Storage shelf 88 Guide 89 Holding member 90 Varnish coater 94 Second temperature detection unit 96 Powder spray unit 100 Control device 102 Stack allowable number determination unit 103 Specified time determination unit 104 Calculation table storage unit 105 Calculation Table 106 Blocking suppression measure presentation processing unit 108 Information presentation unit 110 Selection instruction receiving unit 112 Blocking countermeasure control unit 114 Regular time determination unit 117 Stack speed determination unit 118 Stack speed control unit 120 Air 122 Bundle of printed matter 201 Communication unit 202 Operation unit 203 Display unit 204 Storage unit 210 Transport control unit 211 Feed control unit 212 Processing liquid application control unit 213 Processing liquid drying control unit 214 Image formation control unit 215 Ink drying control unit 216 Varnish application control unit 217 Varnish post-processing control unit 218 Product control unit 219 Powder spray control unit 220 Communication control unit 230 Image processing unit 234 Drying condition setting unit 238 Varnish post-processing condition setting unit 240 Information acquisition unit 242 Display control unit P Paper S21 to S29 Printing processing steps S101 to S111 Stacking method Step Sb1 of decision processing First stack bundle Sb2 Second stack bundle Sb3 Third stack bundle SP Stack position

Claims (26)

  1.  媒体に画像を形成する画像形成部と、
     前記画像形成部を用いて前記画像が形成された前記媒体に水性ニスを塗布するニス塗布部と、
     前記水性ニスが塗布された前記媒体にブロッキング抑止効果を持つパウダーを所定の条件で付与し、特定のスタック速度でスタックする集積部と、
     前記媒体の媒体種、前記水性ニスのニス種、前記画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び、前記集積部で付与されるパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、前記特定のスタック速度でブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能なスタック許容枚数を決定するスタック許容枚数決定部と、
     印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数が前記スタック許容枚数を超える場合に、前記指定された印刷枚数の印刷を実現でき、かつ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示する情報提示部と、
     を備える印刷装置。
    An image forming unit for forming an image on a medium;
    A varnish application unit that applies an aqueous varnish to the medium on which the image is formed using the image formation unit;
    An accumulation unit that applies a powder having a blocking inhibitory effect to the medium coated with the aqueous varnish under predetermined conditions, and stacks at a specific stack speed;
    From the combination of two or more conditions among the medium type of the medium, the varnish type of the aqueous varnish, the ink amount of the ink used for forming the image, and the amount of powder applied in the accumulation portion, the specific An allowable stack number determining unit that determines an allowable stack number that can be stacked without occurrence of blocking at a stack speed; and
    When the number of prints designated as the number of prints exceeds the allowable stack number, information presentation that can realize printing of the designated number of prints and presents at least one blocking suppression measure that suppresses the occurrence of blocking And
    A printing apparatus comprising:
  2.  前記情報提示部に提示される少なくとも1つの前記ブロッキング抑制策の採否を選択する指示の入力を受け付ける選択指示受付部と、
     前記選択指示受付部から入力された選択の指示に従い、前記ブロッキング抑制策の実行を制御する制御部と、
     を備える請求項1に記載の印刷装置。
    A selection instruction receiving unit that receives an input of an instruction for selecting whether or not to adopt at least one blocking suppression measure presented to the information presenting unit;
    In accordance with a selection instruction input from the selection instruction receiving unit, a control unit that controls execution of the blocking suppression measure,
    A printing apparatus according to claim 1.
  3.  前記印刷枚数が前記スタック許容枚数以下である場合に、前記特定のスタック速度にて前記集積部に前記スタック許容枚数以下の枚数の前記媒体をスタックして単一のスタック束を形成するスタック動作が実行される請求項1又は2に記載の印刷装置。 When the number of printed sheets is equal to or less than the allowable number of stacks, a stacking operation is performed in which a single stack bundle is formed by stacking the number of sheets equal to or less than the allowable number of stacks on the stacking unit at the specific stack speed. The printing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the printing apparatus is executed.
  4.  前記特定のスタック速度にて前記集積部に前記媒体をスタックして単一のスタック束を形成するスタック方法を第一のスタック方法という場合に、
     前記ブロッキング抑制策は、前記第一のスタック方法と異なるスタック動作となる第二のスタック方法を実施する方策である請求項1から3のいずれか一項に記載の印刷装置。
    When the stack method of stacking the medium on the stacking unit at the specific stack speed to form a single stack bundle is referred to as a first stack method,
    The printing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the blocking suppression measure is a measure for implementing a second stack method that is a stack operation different from the first stack method.
  5.  前記媒体種、前記ニス種、前記インク量、及び、前記パウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の複数の組み合わせの各々に対する前記スタック許容枚数の値を規定した第一の算出テーブルを記憶しておく算出テーブル記憶部を備え、
     前記スタック許容枚数決定部は、前記第一の算出テーブルを用いて、スタック許容枚数を決定する請求項1から4のいずれか一項に記載の印刷装置。
    Storing a first calculation table that defines a value of the stack allowable number for each of a plurality of combinations of two or more conditions among the medium type, the varnish type, the ink amount, and the powder amount; A calculation table storage unit,
    The printing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the stack allowable number determination unit determines the stack allowable number using the first calculation table.
  6.  前記ブロッキング抑制策の1つは、前記特定のスタック速度にて前記集積部にスタックを行い、スタック枚数が前記スタック許容枚数に到達したら、別のスタック束を新たに積む方策である請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の印刷装置。 One of the blocking suppression measures is a measure of stacking the stacking unit at the specific stack speed and newly stacking another stack bundle when the stack number reaches the stack allowable number. The printing apparatus according to claim 5.
  7.  前記集積部は、前記スタック許容枚数ごとに、スタック束を分離する仕切り部材が配置される集積装置を備え、
     前記仕切り部材の上に前記新たなスタック束が積まれる請求項6に記載の印刷装置。
    The stacking unit includes a stacking device in which a partition member for separating the stack bundle is arranged for each stack allowable number.
    The printing apparatus according to claim 6, wherein the new stack bundle is stacked on the partition member.
  8.  前記集積部は、スタック枚数が前記スタック許容枚数に到達したスタック束を、スタック位置から別の退避位置に移動させるスタック束退避機構を備える請求項6に記載の印刷装置。 The printing apparatus according to claim 6, wherein the stacking unit includes a stack bundle retracting mechanism that moves the stack bundle having reached the stack allowable number from the stack position to another retract position.
  9.  前記スタック束退避機構は、ベルトコンベアを含み、
     前記ベルトコンベアは、複数の前記スタック束のそれぞれを前記ベルトコンベア上の異なる位置に載置し得るベルト長を有する請求項8に記載の印刷装置。
    The stack bundle retracting mechanism includes a belt conveyor,
    The printing apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the belt conveyor has a belt length capable of placing each of the plurality of stack bundles at different positions on the belt conveyor.
  10.  前記スタック束退避機構は、複数の前記スタック束を載置し得る複数のスタックエリアを有する回転台を含み、
     前記回転台を回転させて、前記スタック束が積まれた前記スタックエリアの位置を移動させる請求項8に記載の印刷装置。
    The stack bundle retracting mechanism includes a turntable having a plurality of stack areas on which a plurality of the stack bundles can be placed,
    The printing apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the turntable is rotated to move a position of the stack area on which the stack bundle is stacked.
  11.  前記印刷枚数に対して、前記スタック許容枚数ごとに、新たなスタック束を積むと、スタック束の総数が3以上になる場合に、前記スタック許容枚数に到達した第一番目のスタック束とは別に、新たに積まれた第二番目のスタック束のスタック枚数が前記スタック許容枚数に到達した後、前記第一番目のスタック束のスタック終了から規定時間が経過した前記第一番目のスタック束の上に、第三番目以降のいずれかのスタック束を積む請求項6及び8から10のいずれか一項に記載の印刷装置。 Separately from the first stack bundle that has reached the stack allowable number when the total number of stack bundles becomes 3 or more when a new stack bundle is stacked for each of the stack allowable sheets with respect to the number of printed sheets. A stack of the second stack bundle newly stacked reaches the stack allowable number, and the upper limit of the first stack bundle after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the stack of the first stack bundle. The printing apparatus according to any one of claims 6 and 8 to 10, wherein any one of the third and subsequent stacks is stacked.
  12.  前記ブロッキング抑制策の1つが、前記特定のスタック速度にてスタック束を積み、スタック枚数が前記スタック許容枚数に到達したら、一旦印刷を停止し、規定時間経過した後に、印刷を再開して前記スタック束にスタックを継続する方策である請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の印刷装置。 One of the blocking suppression measures is to stack the stack bundle at the specific stack speed, and when the number of stacks reaches the stack allowable number, the printing is temporarily stopped, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the printing is resumed and the stack is resumed. The printing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the printing apparatus is a measure for continuing a stack in a bundle.
  13.  前記媒体の媒体種、前記水性ニスのニス種、前記画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び、前記パウダーのパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、前記スタック許容枚数に到達した前記スタック束の上に前記特定のスタック速度でブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能な前記規定時間を決定する規定時間決定部を備える請求項11又は12に記載の印刷装置。 From the combination of two or more conditions among the medium type of the medium, the varnish type of the aqueous varnish, the ink amount of the ink used to form the image, and the powder amount of the powder, the allowable number of stacks has been reached. 13. The printing apparatus according to claim 11, further comprising a specified time determination unit that determines the specified time that can be stacked on the stack bundle without blocking at the specific stack speed.
  14.  前記媒体種、前記ニス種、前記インク量、及び、前記パウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の複数の組み合わせに対する前記スタック許容枚数の値及び前記規定時間の値を規定した第二の算出テーブルを記憶しておく算出テーブル記憶部を備え、
     前記規定時間決定部は、前記第二の算出テーブルを用いて、前記規定時間を決定する請求項13に記載の印刷装置。
    A second calculation table defining the stack allowable number value and the specified time value for a plurality of combinations of two or more conditions among the medium type, the varnish type, the ink amount, and the powder amount. Including a calculation table storage unit for storing
    The printing apparatus according to claim 13, wherein the specified time determination unit determines the specified time using the second calculation table.
  15.  前記ブロッキング抑制策の1つが、スタック速度を前記特定のスタック速度よりも遅くする方策である請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の印刷装置。 The printing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein one of the blocking suppression measures is a measure of making a stack speed slower than the specific stack speed.
  16.  ブロッキングの発生が無く前記印刷枚数以上のスタックが可能となるスタック速度を決定するスタック速度決定部と、
     前記スタック速度決定部によって決定されたスタック速度に従い、スタック速度を制御するスタック速度制御部と、
     を備える請求項15に記載の印刷装置。
    A stack speed determining unit that determines a stack speed at which stacking of the number of printed sheets or more is possible without occurrence of blocking;
    A stack speed control unit for controlling the stack speed according to the stack speed determined by the stack speed determination unit;
    The printing apparatus according to claim 15.
  17.  前記スタック速度決定部は、前記印刷枚数と、前記スタック許容枚数と、前記特定のスタック速度とを用いて、前記印刷枚数以上のスタックが可能なスタック速度を算出する請求項16に記載の印刷装置。 The printing apparatus according to claim 16, wherein the stack speed determination unit calculates a stack speed at which stacking that is equal to or greater than the print number can be performed using the number of printed sheets, the stack allowable number, and the specific stack speed. .
  18.  前記スタック速度制御部は、前記媒体の搬送速度を制御する請求項16又は17に記載の印刷装置。 The printing apparatus according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the stack speed control unit controls a conveyance speed of the medium.
  19.  前記スタック速度制御部は、前記媒体を前記画像形成部に供給する媒体供給時間間隔を制御する請求項16又は17に記載の印刷装置。 The printing apparatus according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the stack speed control unit controls a medium supply time interval for supplying the medium to the image forming unit.
  20.  前記ブロッキング抑制策の1つが、前記スタック許容枚数よりも少ない枚数の小部数に分割された前記媒体の束を一定時間保持した後に、前記媒体をスタックすることにより、前記スタック許容枚数を超えるスタック枚数のスタック束を形成する方策である請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の印刷装置。 One of the blocking suppression measures is to hold the bundle of media divided into a smaller number of small copies than the allowable number of stacks for a certain period of time, and then stack the media to exceed the allowable stack number. The printing apparatus according to claim 1, which is a measure for forming a stack bundle.
  21.  前記集積部は、
     前記小部数の前記媒体の束を格納する複数の格納棚を有し、
     前記複数の格納棚を順次移動させて、前記格納棚に前記小部数の前記媒体の束を格納し、前記格納棚に前記小部数の前記媒体の束を一定時間保持する集積装置を備える請求項20に記載の印刷装置。
    The stacking unit
    Having a plurality of storage shelves for storing the bundle of media in the small number of copies;
    The storage device includes an accumulation device that sequentially moves the plurality of storage shelves to store the bundle of the small number of media in the storage shelf and holds the bundle of the small number of media in the storage shelf for a certain period of time. The printing apparatus according to 20.
  22.  前記集積部は、
     前記媒体の側面の方向から、前記媒体の束を拘束する位置にエアーを噴射して、前記噴射したエアーによって前記小部数の前記媒体の束を拘束することにより、前記小部数の前記媒体の束を一定時間保持する集積装置を備える請求項20に記載の印刷装置。
    The stacking unit
    The medium bundle of the small number of parts is obtained by injecting air from a side surface direction of the medium to a position where the bundle of the medium is constrained, and constraining the small number of the medium bundle by the ejected air. The printing apparatus according to claim 20, further comprising: an accumulation device that holds the value for a predetermined time.
  23.  前記集積部は、
     前記小部数の前記媒体の束を保持する可動式の保持部材を備えた集積装置を有し、
     前記保持部材は、前記小部数の前記媒体の束を保持する保持位置と、前記小部数の前記媒体の束を非保持とする非保持位置とに移動可能であり、
     前記保持部材によって前記小部数の前記媒体の束を保持した後、前記保持部材を非保持位置に移動させて保持状態を解除することにより、前記媒体をスタックする請求項20に記載の印刷装置。
    The stacking unit
    A stacking device including a movable holding member that holds the bundle of the small number of the media;
    The holding member is movable to a holding position for holding the bundle of the small number of media and a non-holding position for not holding the bundle of the small number of media;
    The printing apparatus according to claim 20, wherein the medium is stacked by holding the small number of the bundle of the media by the holding member and then moving the holding member to a non-holding position to release the holding state.
  24.  前記画像形成部は、インクジェットヘッドを含む請求項1から23のいずれか一項に記載の印刷装置。 The printing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 23, wherein the image forming unit includes an inkjet head.
  25.  画像が形成された媒体に水性ニスを塗布し、前記水性ニスが塗布された前記媒体にブロッキング抑止効果を持つパウダーを所定の条件で付与し、特定のスタック速度で集積部にスタックする印刷装置の動作を制御する印刷制御方法であって、
     前記画像が形成される前記媒体の媒体種、前記画像が形成された前記媒体に塗布される前記水性ニスのニス種、前記画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び、前記集積部で付与されるパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、前記特定のスタック速度でブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能なスタック許容枚数を決定するスタック許容枚数決定工程と、
     印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数が前記スタック許容枚数を超える場合に、前記指定された印刷枚数の印刷を実現でき、かつ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示する情報提示工程と、
     を含む印刷制御方法。
    A printing apparatus in which an aqueous varnish is applied to a medium on which an image is formed, a powder having a blocking inhibitory effect is applied to the medium on which the aqueous varnish is applied under predetermined conditions, and is stacked on a stacking unit at a specific stack speed. A printing control method for controlling operation,
    The medium type of the medium on which the image is formed, the varnish type of the aqueous varnish applied to the medium on which the image is formed, the ink amount of the ink used for forming the image, and the accumulation unit. A stack allowable number determining step for determining a stack allowable number that can be stacked without occurrence of blocking at the specific stack speed from a combination of two or more conditions among the amount of powder to be obtained;
    When the number of prints designated as the number of prints exceeds the allowable stack number, information presentation that can realize printing of the designated number of prints and presents at least one blocking suppression measure that suppresses the occurrence of blocking Process,
    A printing control method.
  26.  画像が形成される媒体の媒体種、前記画像が形成された前記媒体に塗布される水性ニスのニス種、前記画像の形成に用いるインクのインク量、及び、前記水性ニスが塗布された前記媒体に所定の条件で集積部にて付与されるブロッキング抑止効果を持つパウダーのパウダー量のうち、2つ以上の条件の組み合わせから、特定のスタック速度でブロッキングの発生が無くスタックすることが可能なスタック許容枚数を決定するスタック許容枚数決定部と、
     印刷する枚数として指定された印刷枚数が前記スタック許容枚数を超える場合に、前記指定された印刷枚数の印刷を実現でき、かつ、ブロッキングの発生を抑制する少なくとも1つのブロッキング抑制策を提示する情報提示部と、
     を備える印刷制御装置。
    Medium type of medium on which an image is formed, varnish type of aqueous varnish applied to the medium on which the image is formed, ink amount of ink used for forming the image, and the medium on which the aqueous varnish is applied A stack that can be stacked without causing blocking at a specific stack speed from a combination of two or more conditions of the amount of powder that has a blocking inhibitory effect imparted to the stacking part under a predetermined condition. A stack allowable number determining unit for determining the allowable number;
    When the number of prints designated as the number of prints exceeds the allowable stack number, information presentation that can realize printing of the designated number of prints and presents at least one blocking suppression measure that suppresses the occurrence of blocking And
    A printing control apparatus comprising:
PCT/JP2018/012110 2017-03-29 2018-03-26 Printing device, printing control method, and device WO2018181165A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017-065295 2017-03-29
JP2017065295 2017-03-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018181165A1 true WO2018181165A1 (en) 2018-10-04

Family

ID=63676408

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/012110 WO2018181165A1 (en) 2017-03-29 2018-03-26 Printing device, printing control method, and device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018181165A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7681295B2 (en) 2021-04-20 2025-05-22 富士機械工業株式会社 Web Processing Equipment

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS53145508U (en) * 1977-04-20 1978-11-16
US4882992A (en) * 1988-07-29 1989-11-28 Airtech Company, Inc. Combination powder applying and/or infrared drying attachment for printing presses
JPH08164600A (en) * 1994-12-14 1996-06-25 Tohoku Ricoh Co Ltd Printing apparatus
JP2012137631A (en) * 2010-12-27 2012-07-19 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming apparatus
JP2015205414A (en) * 2014-04-17 2015-11-19 株式会社ミマキエンジニアリング Ink jet printer and ink jet printing method
JP2016107419A (en) * 2014-12-02 2016-06-20 富士フイルム株式会社 Inkjet printer, inkjet printing method, and inkjet printing system

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS53145508U (en) * 1977-04-20 1978-11-16
US4882992A (en) * 1988-07-29 1989-11-28 Airtech Company, Inc. Combination powder applying and/or infrared drying attachment for printing presses
JPH08164600A (en) * 1994-12-14 1996-06-25 Tohoku Ricoh Co Ltd Printing apparatus
JP2012137631A (en) * 2010-12-27 2012-07-19 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming apparatus
JP2015205414A (en) * 2014-04-17 2015-11-19 株式会社ミマキエンジニアリング Ink jet printer and ink jet printing method
JP2016107419A (en) * 2014-12-02 2016-06-20 富士フイルム株式会社 Inkjet printer, inkjet printing method, and inkjet printing system

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7681295B2 (en) 2021-04-20 2025-05-22 富士機械工業株式会社 Web Processing Equipment

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2756954B1 (en) System and method for image surface preparation in an aqueous inkjet printer
JP6318054B2 (en) System and method for processing an image receiving surface of an indirect inkjet printer
US9227429B1 (en) Indirect aqueous inkjet printer with media conveyor that facilitates media stripping in a transfer nip
JP6317664B2 (en) Inkjet printing apparatus, inkjet printing method, and inkjet printing system
JP2010005997A (en) Inkjet recorder and head maintenance method
JP2019104164A (en) Image recorder and image recording method
JP2009285878A (en) Inkjet recorder and purge method
JP2013022867A (en) Image forming apparatus and image forming method
US9056495B2 (en) System and method for imaging and evaluating coating on an imaging surface in an aqueous inkjet printer
WO2018181165A1 (en) Printing device, printing control method, and device
EP2722188B1 (en) Method for analyzing positional deviation of head modules, program, and method for adjusting inkjet head
EP2965917B1 (en) Image-forming device
JP2013027981A (en) Image forming apparatus, and image forming method
EP3683061B1 (en) Printing apparatus, printing method, varnish information output method, and recoding medium information output method
US8317286B2 (en) System and method for improving throughput for duplex printing operations in an indirect printing system
JP2017222441A (en) Image forming apparatus and varnish application method
JP6843981B2 (en) Printing device, drying control method, and drying control device
EP3208092A1 (en) Liquid ejection device and cleaning method
US9073357B1 (en) Indirect inkjet printer and blower for treatment of a hydrophilic layer on an image receiving surface in the indirect inkjet printer
US9604471B2 (en) System and method for operating an aqueous inkjet printer to coat media prior to printing images on the media with the aqueous inkjet printer
JP7691653B2 (en) CLEANING DEVICE, LIQUID DISCHARGE UNIT, AND LIQUID DISCHARGE APPARATUS
JP2006007427A (en) Image recorder
US20220072873A1 (en) System And Method For Removing Ink Solvent And Water Vapors In Aqueous Ink Printers
US9566793B2 (en) Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and non-transitory computer readable medium
JP6476838B2 (en) Image recording apparatus and program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18776395

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18776395

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

点击 这是indexloc提供的php浏览器服务,不要输入任何密码和下载